JP6086400B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine.

  Conventionally, slot machines are widely known as one of gaming machines. In this type of slot machine, when a player inserts a prescribed number of game media such as medals and game balls, the start switch operation becomes effective, and when the player operates the start switch in this state, a lottery drawing is performed. A plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols drawn thereon start to rotate. When the rotation speed of the reel reaches a certain speed, the operation of the stop switch provided corresponding to each reel becomes effective, and when the player operates the stop switch, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is displayed. Stop.

  Here, when any combination is won in the above-described combination lottery, it corresponds to the winning combination within a range of 190 milliseconds after the stop switch is operated (hereinafter also referred to as “retraction range”). Reel stop control (retraction control) is performed so that the symbol combinations are aligned on the effective line. On the other hand, when the combination lottery is lost, reel stop control (kicking control) is performed so that symbol combinations corresponding to some combination are not aligned on the effective line. If all the reels stop and the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the active line corresponds to any combination, it means that the combination has won a prize, and a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player. Is granted. For this privilege, the above-mentioned game medium is given to the player, or the game can be executed without inserting the game medium only in the next game (re-game), and a predetermined end condition is established from the next game. Until then, there is a so-called bonus game that is advantageous to the player.

  In addition, for example, the slot machine described in Patent Document 1 includes a small part (hereinafter referred to as “push order”) that cannot be won unless the stop operation is performed according to a predetermined operation procedure, and is performed by the main control unit. When a specific winning combination is won internally by the winning combination lottery, the sub control unit enters the AT state. When the AT state is entered, the sub-control unit notifies the predetermined operation procedure described above when the push winning combination is won internally in the combination lottery. Thereby, in the AT state, if the player performs a stop operation in accordance with the notified predetermined operation procedure, it is possible to win a push forward. On the other hand, in the non-AT state, the operation procedure for winning the push forward is not notified, and the push forward win depends on chance. In this way, a state (AT state) advantageous to the player is created by controlling whether or not to notify a predetermined operation procedure.

JP 2009-178190 A

  In many of the conventional slot machines, the main control unit performs control related to the game, and the sub-control unit performs control related to performance and notification based on the information related to the game received from the main control unit. Since the AT state described above can be said to be a state in which an operation procedure for winning the push order is performed, control such as start and end of the AT state is performed by the sub-control unit. In addition, since the conventional slot machine does not transmit information from the sub-control unit to the main control unit from the viewpoint of reducing room for fraud, the main control unit directly determines whether or not it is in the AT state. Could not be judged.

  For example, in the case of the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, the main control unit was able to win the push order when the push order was won in the lottery (operated according to a predetermined operation procedure). It is determined that the game is in the AT state when the game continues for a predetermined number of times.

  However, although it is control related to the notification of the operation procedure, the presence or absence of the notification is related to an advantageous state of the game, so the main control unit controls the AT state (hereinafter also referred to as “AT control”). It is desirable to do. When the main control unit performs AT control, it is possible to accurately determine the start and end of the AT state. Therefore, the main control unit provides information on the AT state (a predetermined operation procedure in the AT state, the AT state, The number of remaining games until the end of the game or the number of notifications of a predetermined operation procedure can be notified.

  When configured in this way, for example, even if the sub-control unit malfunctions when it is in the AT state, the game in the AT state can be continued only by the main control unit. There is no giving. However, when notifying information related to the AT state in the main control unit, the existing hardware such as a display device should be diverted from the viewpoint of cost, and the processing load related to notification and the capacity of the program required for the processing should be reduced as much as possible. Is desirable.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine capable of reducing the cost and processing burden for notifying information related to the AT state by the main control unit.

In order to solve the problems described above, the present invention provides:
Multiple reels,
A stop switch for stopping the reel;
A display means having a plurality of segments and capable of displaying information relating to the operation mode of the stop switch or information relating to the game medium;
A role determination means for determining the winning role;
Storage means capable of storing in a predetermined storage area information for displaying information on the operation mode of the stop switch on the display means ;
A segment table in which the lighting mode of the segment is defined ;
Gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
With
As a gaming state, it has a notification gaming state for notifying the operation mode of the stop switch,
In the notification game state, when a predetermined combination is determined by the combination determination unit, information for displaying information on an operation mode of a stop switch on the display unit can be stored in the predetermined storage area, Information on the operation mode of the stop switch by enabling the lighting mode of the segment from the segment table based on the information stored in a predetermined storage area and lighting the segment of the display means in the lighting mode of the determined segment Can be displayed ,
In predetermined game state that is different from the notification gaming state, when the predetermined combination is determined by the combination determining means it is characterized not to display the information about the operation mode of the stop switch on the display means.

  Here, the “stop switch operation mode” corresponds to the stop switch operation sequence, the timing of operating the stop switch, and the like. Moreover, when notifying the timing which operates a stop switch, you may alert | report the symbol combination corresponding to the combination determined by the "comb determination means", for example. Thereby, it is understood that the player only has to operate the stop switch at the timing when the symbols constituting the notified symbol combination are located within the drawing range with reference to the winning line. Moreover, as a mode in the case of “not displaying information on the operation mode of the stop switch on the first display unit and the second display unit”, all the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit are turned off. Alternatively, a specific display mode (for example, a numeral “0” or an operator “−”) may be displayed on the first display and the second display, respectively.

  According to the above-described invention, in order to display the information regarding the operation mode of the stop switch on the “first display” and the “second display” displaying the information regarding the game medium, a new display is provided. There is no need to add, and the cost can be reduced. In addition, by storing specific information in a predetermined storage area, information regarding the operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed on the “first display” and the “second display”, so the segment table is referred to. The processing can be omitted, and the processing load for notifying information on the AT state can be reduced.

  As described above, according to the slot machine of the present invention, it is possible to reduce the cost and processing burden for informing the information related to the AT state by the main control unit.

It is a front view showing the appearance of the slot machine according to the present invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the symbol arrangement | sequence of each reel with which the slot machine is provided. It is a functional block diagram which shows the functional structure of the slot machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the winning lottery table defining the winning probability of each winning combination in the winning lottery of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of winning combination in the slot lottery of the slot machine, and the condition apparatus corresponding to each winning combination. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of conditional apparatus and its symbol combination in the slot machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the reel stop control according to the stop operation in a state where the re-game is won in the role lottery of the slot machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the reel stop control according to the stop operation in a state where a winning is won in the role lottery of the slot machine. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific symbol combination that may be displayed when a specific winning is missed in the game of the slot machine. It is a state transition diagram showing the transition of the lottery state regarding the winning probability of each lottery in the role lottery of the slot machine and the transition conditions. It is a state transition diagram showing the transition of the main mode related to the execution of AT in the slot machine and the transition conditions. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the alerting | reporting aspect of the operation sequence of the stop switch controlled by the main control means of the slot machine. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the alerting | reporting timing of the operation sequence of the stop switch each controlled by the main control means and sub-control means of the slot machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of an abnormality (error) that is a detection target in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the LED segment table referred when performing display with the 7 segment indicator of the slot machine. It is a circuit diagram which shows the wiring of the signal output to each 7 segment display via an output port from the main control board of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the signal output from each output port of the slot machine. It is a circuit diagram which shows the wiring of the signal output to each 7 segment indicator and LED of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating correspondence with the number (digit) corresponding to each 7 segment display of the slot machine, and each segment of a 7 segment display, and the bit of data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a part of content of the information memorize | stored in the memory of the main control means of the slot machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining main ones of commands transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means of the slot machine. It is an explanatory view for explaining main ones of commands transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the winning number transmitted to the sub control means from the main control means of the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the game progress main process performed in order that the main control means of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention controls progress of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the non-AT state process performed within the game progress main process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the AT state process performed within the game progress main process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the process in AT preparation performed within the AT state process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the process in AT preparation performed within the AT state process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the common process 1 performed in the process in AT preparation in the AT state process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the process in the special zone performed within the AT state process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the process in the special zone performed within the AT state process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the special zone preparation process performed within the AT state process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the special zone preparation process performed within the AT state process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the process in AT performed in the AT state process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the process in AT performed in the AT state process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the common process 2 performed in the process in AT in the same AT state process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the common process 3 performed in the process in AT in the AT state process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the freeze lottery process performed within the game progress main process of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the pushing order display process performed within the game progress main process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the game completion | finish check process performed within the game progress main process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the game completion | finish check process performed within the game progress main process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of RT transfer process performed within the game completion | finish check process. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the common process 4 performed within the RT transfer process in the same game end check process. 4 is a flowchart showing detailed contents of a non-recoverable error process executed when a non-recoverable abnormality occurs in the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the timer interruption process performed by the main control means of the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the LED display control process performed by the timer interruption process, and controls the display of each 7 segment display. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a relationship between a control command transmission timing and a push order display timing in the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention; It is a flowchart which shows the content of the sub power-on process performed at the time of power-on in the sub-control means of the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of 1 command processing performed within the process at the time of the sub power-on. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the process at the time of the start switch operation performed within 1 command process in the process at the time of the sub power-on. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the process at the time of the stop operation reception performed at the time of the 1st-3rd stop operation reception performed within 1 command process in the same sub power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the game progress main process performed in order that the main control means of the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention controls progress of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the dummy command set process performed within the game progress main process. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the transmission timing of the control command and the display timing of the pressing order in the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the game progress main process performed in order that the main control means of the slot machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention controls progress of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the detailed content of the freeze lottery process performed within the game progress main process. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a relationship between a control command transmission timing and a push order display timing in the slot machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention;

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

1. First Embodiment [Description of Case Structure]
FIG. 1 shows an external front view of the slot machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a box for accommodating various devices therein, and a front door provided on the front surface of the box so as to be opened and closed. A front panel 20 is provided on the front door, and a display window 22 is formed at the approximate center thereof. Inside the slot machine 10, there are provided three reels 40L, 40C and 40R which are rotatably provided, and the symbols printed on the outer peripheral surface of each reel can be viewed from the display window 22. The reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are installed such that the rotation axes are aligned on the same straight line in the horizontal direction. Each reel has a ring shape, and a strip-shaped reel tape on which one symbol is printed is affixed to 20 equally divided symbol regions on the outer peripheral surface thereof. When the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped, three symbols that are continuous along the rotation direction of each reel out of the twenty symbols printed on each reel are visible from the display window 22. It has become. In other words, 3 [symbol] × 3 [reel] = 9 symbols in total are stopped and displayed on the display window 22. Here, among the three consecutive symbols displayed when the reels 40L, 40C and 40R are stopped, the position where the uppermost symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as the stop display position) is the upper U, The position where the symbol is stopped and displayed is called the middle M, and the position where the lowermost symbol is stopped and displayed is called the lower D.

  The display window 22 has a single pay line L (also referred to as an effective line) that crosses each middle stage M of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R. The winning line L is a line that serves as a reference when determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a plurality of types of predetermined combinations (described later) is stopped and displayed. That is, when the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped, the combination of the three symbols arranged side by side stopped and displayed at the stop display position (the middle stage M of each reel) through which the winning line L passes serves as one of the roles. If it corresponds, the role has won. In the following, when it is described simply that “the symbol combination is stopped and displayed” or “the symbol (or symbol combination) is ready”, the symbol combination is stopped and displayed along the winning line L. Means.

  In addition to the display window 22, the front panel 20 is provided with various lamps and a display for notifying the player of various information regarding the game. Below the display window 22, as shown in FIG. 1B, in order from the left, a game start LED 25, insertion display LEDs 26a, 26b, and 26c, a credit number display 27 (also referred to as a stored number display), An acquired number display 28 (also referred to as a payout number display), an insertion possible display LED 24, a replay display LED 23, and a settlement display LED 22 are provided. The game start LED 25 is turned on when an operation of a start switch 36, which will be described later, can be accepted, and is turned off when the operation is other than that. The insertion display LEDs 26a, 26b, and 26c are for displaying the number of medals bet on one game. Here, when one medal is bet, the one-insertion display LED 26a is turned on. When two medals are bet, the one-insertion display LED 26a and the two-insertion display LED 26b are turned on, and three medals are displayed. When a bet is placed, the 1-sheet insertion display LED 26a, the 2-sheet insertion display LED 26b, and the 3-sheet insertion display LED 26c are lit.

  A medal to bet to play a game in the slot machine 10 is a kind of game medium. The game medium is not limited to a medal, and may be a game ball (so-called pachinko ball), a magnetic card, a non-contact IC. It may be information indicating the value recorded on a recording medium such as a coin containing a card or an IC chip. In the slot machine 10, when three medals are bet, one game can be performed, and the winning line L is an effective line. The credit number display 27 is a two-digit 7-segment display and is credited (stored) in the slot machine 10 (more specifically, RWM (read / write memory; storage in a main control means 100 described later). The number of medals stored in the rewritable memory.) Is displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, the upper limit number of medals that can be credited is 50. The acquired number display 28 is a 2-digit 7-segment display, and displays the number of medals to be paid out to the player according to the game result.

  The insertable display LED 24 is turned on when the insertion of a medal is accepted, and is turned off when the insertion of a medal is not accepted. The re-game display LED 23 is turned on when a re-game described later is started, and is turned off when the re-game is finished. The clearing display LED 22 is lit while a credited medal is paid out when a clearing switch 33 described later is operated.

  On the lower side of the front panel 20 described above, there is provided an operation panel 30 that is formed substantially horizontally over the entire width of the slot machine 10 and protrudes toward the player. A medal insertion slot 32 for inserting medals into the slot machine 10 is provided on the upper right side of the operation panel 30. In addition, a medal sensor (insertion sensor) is provided in the slot machine 10 (specifically, a selector for selecting medals), and when a medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 32 is detected, a description will be given later. The medal detection signal is output to the main control means 100. Based on this medal detection signal, the main control means 100 performs an abnormality detection such as counting the number of inserted medals and an illegal act at the time of inserting medals.

  On the left side of the upper surface of the operation panel 30, bet switches 34 and 35 for betting credited medals on the slot machine 10 (in other words, setting a bet amount) are provided. Each time the 1-bet switch 34 is operated, only one of the credited medals is bet as a game betting target. The maximum bet switch 35 bets the maximum number (specified number) of medals that can be bet in the current game among the credited medals as a target for betting on the game. Here, in the slot machine 10, the prescribed number is three. Further, when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 32 in a state where medals are bet up to the prescribed number, the inserted medal is stored in the credit. When a prescribed number of medals are bet and a medal is inserted into the medal slot 32 in a state where the number stored in the credit reaches an upper limit (for example, 50), the medal is a medal described later. It is returned to the tray 61 from the payout opening 60.

  A start switch 36 is tiltably provided on the front left side of the operation panel 30. The start switch 36 is activated when the player bets a predetermined number of medals on the slot machine 10. However, when a re-gamer to be described later wins, the bet number bet on the previous game (game in which the re-gamer wins) is automatically bet, and the bet number display lamps 26a, 26b, and 26c are defined. The lights are turned on for the number of sheets, and the operation of the start switch 36 for performing the next game becomes effective. When a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 32 in this state, the medal may be returned to the tray 61 or stored until the upper limit value of credit is reached.

  When the player operates the start switch 36 in a state where the operation of the start switch 36 is valid, the three reels 40L, 40C, and 40R start to rotate. As a result, the symbols printed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are displayed in a manner that changes (scrolls) from the top to the bottom in the display window 22 as a general rule. May be displayed fluctuating from bottom to top.

  Stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R are provided in the center of the front surface of the operation panel 30 so as to correspond to the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R. Here, the stop switches 37L, 37C and 37R are so-called self-illuminated push button switches, and have a structure in which the light emission color can be changed while the portion of the push button emits light. For example, when the operation of the stop switch is disabled, the push button portion of the stop switch is emitted in red, and when it is activated, it is emitted in blue. The stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R are played on condition that the rotational speeds of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R have reached a predetermined steady rotational speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute; also simply referred to as “constant speed”). The user's operation becomes valid (a state in which reception is possible). It should be noted that while the player's operation on the stop switch is invalid (not accepted), the stop switch may be turned off instead of emitting red light.

  Further, when the left stop switch 37L is pushed during the game, the reel stop control of the left reel 40L is performed in the game to stop the rotation, and when the middle stop switch 37C is pushed, the middle reel When the 40C reel stop control is performed to stop the rotation and the right stop switch 37R is pushed, the reel stop control of the right reel 40R is performed to stop the rotation. In the following, the operation of the first stop switch after all reels have started to rotate is referred to as a first stop operation, the second operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last operation is referred to as a third stop operation. When the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped, the center positions of the three symbol areas that are stopped and displayed on the display window 22 among the twenty symbol areas set on the outer peripheral surface of each reel are displayed in the display window 22. Is stopped so as to coincide with the center positions of the upper stage U, the middle stage M, and the lower stage D set in FIG. Here, the position where the center position of the symbol area coincides with the center position of the stop display position is referred to as a fixed position.

  A clearing switch 33 is provided on the left side of the operation panel 30. When operated during the medal bet acceptance period, all bets and credited medals are paid back, and a credit number indicator The value displayed in 27 is “0”. Here, the medal bet acceptance period is, for example, after all reels stop (when medals are paid out, after the medals are paid out), a prescribed number of medals are bet and the start switch 36 Until the operation becomes valid. When the above-described clearing switch 33 is operated once, bet medals and all medals that have been credited are paid out. For example, when there are medals that have been bet and medals that have been credit bet. When the clearing switch 33 is operated, only the bet medals are paid back, and in this state (in the state where no medals are bet), when the clearing switch 33 is operated again, the credited medals You may make it pay out all. Also, if a replaying player wins a certain game and the clearing switch 33 is operated when the next game is replayed, only the credited medal is paid back and the replay is executed as it is. It should be possible.

  A lower panel 50 on which a model name of the slot machine 10 and characters adopted as a motif are drawn is arranged below the operation panel 30. A medal payout opening 60 for paying out medals to the player is provided at a substantially lower center of the lower panel 50. For example, when the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped and a combination of three symbols that are stopped and displayed along the winning line L corresponds to a small role, the number of medals corresponding to the small role is credited. Or a medal payout device installed in the slot machine 10 is activated (specifically, a hopper motor is driven), and a prize is awarded among medals stored in the hopper of the medal payout device. The number of medals corresponding to the small role is paid out. When the clearing switch 33 is operated in a state where medals are credited, the credited medals are paid out. The medals paid out from the medal payout opening 60 are stored in the tray 61. On the right side and the left side of the medal payout opening 60, sound transmission holes 62R and 62L are provided for allowing sounds emitted from speakers 64R and 64L (described later) housed inside the slot machine 10 to pass outside. Yes.

  Above the front panel 20, an image display device 70 composed of a liquid crystal display panel is provided. The image display device 70 is not limited to the liquid crystal display panel described above, and any other display device can be used as long as the image information and the character information can be visually recognized by the player during the game. This image display device 70 displays a game history, an effect image displayed during the game, an effect image for notifying a result of a role lottery and an operation mode (operation timing or operation order, etc.) of a stop switch, It is possible to display an effect image or the like corresponding to the progress of the game inherent in the slot machine (medal bet → operation of start switch 36 → reel rotation → operation of stop switches 37L, 37C, 37R → all reel rotation stop). Above the image display device 70, the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped and a predetermined pattern is used depending on a case where a winning combination is won or a medal is easily paid out by a game. A flashing effect lamp 72 is provided.

[Description of symbol and symbol arrangement]
Next, with reference to FIG. 2, the arrangement of symbols printed on the reel tape attached to the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 40L, 40C and 40R will be described. Twenty symbols are printed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R as shown in FIG. Each symbol has one symbol printed on each symbol region divided into 20 equal parts in the longitudinal direction of the reel tape. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2B, the types of symbols displayed in each symbol area include a “red 7” symbol and a “white 7” symbol in which the numeral 7 is represented in red and white, and “BAR”. "Bar" design with the letters "", "Replay A" design with a light blue plum motif, "Replay B" design with a purple plum motif, and "Bell" with a yellow bell motif There are “Watermelon A” and “Watermelon B” designs with a green watermelon motif, “Cherry” designs with a red cherry motif, and “Tree” designs with a large tree motif.

  In addition, symbol numbers “0” to “19” are determined in advance in each symbol region of the reel tape attached to each of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R, as shown in FIG. A symbol type code corresponding to the symbol number is stored in the ROM of the main control means 100. The slot machine 10 recognizes the symbols displayed at the respective stop display positions (upper U, middle M, lower D) of the display window 22, and performs reel stop control described later. Referenced when doing. Each reel tape shown in FIG. 2A shows a state where the symbol numbers “0” and “1” are separated and developed, and the reel tapes are attached to the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 40L, 40C and 40R. In this case, the symbols with symbol numbers “0” and “1” are consecutive.

[Description of control means]
Next, control means for controlling the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to a functional block diagram shown in FIG. The control means of the slot machine 10 includes a main control means 100 that controls the progress of the game and a sub-control means 200 that controls the effect of the game. The main control means 100 performs control to advance the game in accordance with the player's operation, and the sub-control means 200 performs effects and various information executed with the game based on the information transmitted from the main control means 100. The control which alert | reports is performed. Note that transmission of information exchanged between the main control unit 100 and the sub control unit 200 is limited to one direction from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200, and some information is transmitted from the sub control unit 200. There is no direct transmission to the main control means 100.

≪Description of main control means≫
<Main control means and peripheral hardware configuration>
The main control means 100 comprises a CPU, ROM, RWM, random number generation means (random number circuit), timer count means (timer circuit), and I / O port in one chip. The main control means 100 is also called a main control board, and a circuit for realizing the function of the main control means 100 is configured on a single board. The CPU described above includes an accumulator (A register) for performing an operation, a plurality of general-purpose registers (B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, and L register), and a flag register. ing. Each of these registers is composed of 1 byte (8 bits). Of the general-purpose registers, the B and C registers, the D and E registers, and the H and L registers can be used as a pair of 16-bit (2-byte) registers, respectively. When two general purpose registers are used in pairs, two alphabets representing each register are described together. For example, when an H register and an L register are used as a pair, they are expressed as an HL register.

  The flag register is a flag in which each bit indicates a state related to the calculation result by the CPU. The flag register of the present embodiment includes a carry flag, a zero flag, and a second zero flag. Here, the carry flag is a flag that becomes “1” when a carry occurs when an operation (addition) is performed. The zero flag is a flag that becomes “1” when the calculation result becomes “0”. The second zero flag is a flag that becomes “1” when the zero flag becomes “0” and when a predetermined operation (LD instruction) is performed. 3, the same components as those shown in FIG. 1 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The random number generation means generates a random number used when performing various lotteries, and the timer count means generates an interrupt request signal based on a count value of a clock signal for operating a CPU or the like. The I / O port includes operation means 300, various lamps, stepping motors 42L, 42C, 42R, reel rotation position sensors 44L, 44C, 44R, blocker 45, hopper motor 46, payout sensor 47, door switch 48, setting. A signal for each component such as the door switch 49 and the external concentrated terminal board 84 is output, and a signal from each component is input. The various lamps include, for example, a setting indicator 81 provided on the main control board described above in addition to the one shown in FIG. The setting display 81 is composed of one 7-segment display and displays setting values (1 to 6) described later.

  Here, the stepping motors 42L, 42C, 42R rotate or stop the corresponding reels 40L, 40C, 40R according to the excitation signal output from the main control means 100. The reel rotation position sensors 44L, 44C, 44R are provided corresponding to the reels 40L, 40C, 40R, respectively, and when detecting an index (a member to be detected) provided at the reference position of the corresponding reel, the detection signal Is output to the main control means 100. Thereby, the main control means 100 can recognize the rotation position of the reel (and the symbol displayed in the display window 22) based on the number of steps of the stepping motor that has started counting from the index position. .

  The hopper motor 46 is provided in a medal payout device (not shown) having a hopper for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 32, and is stored according to a drive signal output from the main control means 100. The medal is discharged from the medal payout opening 60. The payout sensor 47 detects medals to be paid out when the hopper motor 46 is driven, and outputs a detection signal to the main control means 100. The blocker 45 is installed in a selector provided inside the slot machine 10 and forms or releases a medal flow path according to an on / off signal from the main control means 100. The medals inserted from the medal slot 32 are stored in the hopper of the medal payout device when the medal flow path is formed (blocker is on), and the medal flow path is not formed (blocker is off). At this time, it is discharged from the medal payout outlet 60. The door switch 48 detects opening / closing of the front door described above, and outputs a detection signal to the main control means 100. The setting door switch 49 detects opening / closing of a setting door that covers a setting change key switch 92 and a reset / setting switch 93 for setting a setting value, which will be described later, and outputs a detection signal to the main control means 100. To do.

  The external concentration terminal board 84 relays various signals output from the main control means 100 to the external game information display device or hall computer with respect to the game currently being played by the slot machine 10. As a signal transmitted from the main control means 100 to the outside, a bet signal (IN signal) indicating the number of bets placed on the game based on the operation of the start switch 36 (IN signal), that a small role has won A payout signal (OUT signal) indicating the number of payouts based on the payout, a signal (BB signal) indicating that the winning lottery state described later is in BB, and a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10 ( An abnormality occurrence signal) and a signal (AT signal) indicating that an AT game described later is being performed. Here, the external concentration terminal board 84 may represent the contents of the various signals described above by a potential indicating a high level and a potential indicating a low level, or by providing relay circuits corresponding to various signals, You may represent the content of the various signals mentioned above by opening and closing a relay circuit.

  In addition to the various switches provided on the front door of the slot machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, the operation means 300 includes a power switch 91, a setting change key switch 92 and a reset / setting switch 93 provided inside the slot machine 10. including. The power switch 91 is a switch for turning on / off the power supplied to the slot machine 10. The setting change key switch 92 has a keyhole, and is turned on or off by rotating a setting change key inserted into the keyhole. The reset / setting switch 93 is a push button type switch that is operated when an error is detected to return from the error state or change a setting value to be described later.

<Functional blocks of main control means>
Next, functional blocks of the main control unit 100 will be described. The main control unit 100 includes a winning combination determination unit 110, a freeze control unit 120, a reel control unit 130, a gaming state control unit 140, a winning determination unit 150, an abnormality detection unit 160, and an LED display control unit 170. , Control command transmission means 180 and external signal transmission means 190. The function of each means described below is realized by executing a control program stored in the ROM by the CPU constituting the main control means 100.

(Explanation of the winning role determination means)
The winning combination determining unit 110 determines the winning combination by lottery based on random numbers (numeric range: 0 to 65535) generated by the random number generating unit included in the main control unit 100. Here, there are three types of winning roles: bonus, replay and winning. When these winning roles (hereinafter referred to as “bonus role”, “replaying role” and “winning role”) win, A predetermined privilege will be given to the player. That is, when a bonus combination is won, a bonus game advantageous to the player (hereinafter also referred to as “special game”) is played from the next game until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. When the re-game player wins, the game can be played again without inserting medals only for the next game. Here, a game that can be executed without inserting a medal when the re-game player wins is called a re-game. Further, when the winning combination is won, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player.

  Here, FIG. 4 shows a lottery table in which the winning probability of each winning combination is determined. In the lottery performed by the winning combination determining means 110, BB01 which is a bonus combination, re-games -A to T which are re-playing combinations, and winnings -A to S which are winning combinations are defined as winning combinations. In addition, seven RT states, that is, non-RT and RT1 to RT6, are defined, and the winning probabilities of the winning combinations described above differ depending on each RT state. The RT state shifts in accordance with a predetermined transition condition, and the determination of the transition condition and the transition destination are controlled by the lottery state transition means 142 described later.

  In addition, with regard to the winning combination in each RT state, there is a possibility that a bonus combination, replay -C to H, and winning -A to R will be won in non-RT, and a bonus combination and replay -B in RT1. ~ H, winnings -A ~ R may win. In RT2, a bonus combination, replays -I to N, and winnings -A to R may be won. In RT3, there is a possibility that a bonus combination, replay -O to T, and winning -A to R will be won. In RT4, there is a possibility that a bonus combination, replay-A and OT, and winnings -A to R will be won. In RT5, there is a possibility that re-games -C to H and winning -A to R will be won, and in RT6, only winning -S is always won (winning probability 100%).

  In addition, among the respective RT states, the combined winning probability of the non-RT and RT1 is the lowest (1 / 7.3 and 1/7301, respectively). Hereinafter, RT5, RT2, RT3, RT4 The combined winning probability of the re-gamer is higher in the order of. The higher the combined winning probability of the re-gamer, the more opportunities to play the game without inserting medals, and in particular, there is a possibility that a bonus combination will be won in RT2-4, which is advantageous to the player. It can be said that it is in a state.

  In the present embodiment, five lottery tables having winning probabilities different from the winning probabilities in the lottery table shown in FIG. 4 are provided, which are used in the game by a setting change key 93 and a reset / setting switch 94 described later. A lottery table can be specified. That is, each lottery table is preliminarily assigned one unique number among the numbers 1 to 6 (corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6), and is set by the setting change key 93 and the reset / setting switch 94. The lottery table corresponding to the set values (1 to 6) is used in the game.

  A predetermined condition device is defined for each winning combination shown in FIG. 4, and when the winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means 110, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning combination is activated. Reel stop control is performed so that symbol combinations corresponding to the condition device (details will be described later) are aligned on the winning line L (that is, the winning combination can be won). One condition device may be associated with one winning combination, or a plurality of condition devices may be associated. In the following description, the fact that the symbol combinations are aligned on the winning line L is also simply referred to as “the symbol combinations are aligned”.

  FIG. 5 shows the relationship between the winning combination and the operating condition device. Here, FIG. 5A shows a condition device that operates when a bonus combination is won, and FIG. 5B shows a condition device that operates when a re-game combination and a winning combination are won. As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the condition device that operates when the bonus combination is won is BB01, and once the condition device BB01 is activated, the condition device is maintained until the bonus combination is won. This state is called “internal” or “carrying over a bonus flag”.

  As a result of the lottery by the winning combination determining means 110, if any winning combination is won, information based on each winning combination is transmitted to the sub-control means 200. Specifically, for a bonus combination, a winning combination number is transmitted, but for a winning combination and a re-playing combination, the winning / replay winning number corresponding to the winning combination is not transmitted as it is, Information based on the corresponding winning / replaying winning number (“effect group number” to be described later) is transmitted. At least during non-AT, the winning / replay winning number corresponding to the winning combination is not transmitted to the sub-control means 200 as it is. However, the information based on the winning / replaying winning number (information that can not specify the winning / replaying winning number, but can identify the type of winning combination (small role or replaying player or lost)) You may transmit to the control means 200. FIG. Also, regardless of the gaming state such as during AT / non-AT, it is possible to uniformly prevent winning / re-game winning numbers from being transmitted. If the uniform winning number is not transmitted, the judgment capacity is reduced and the program capacity of the ROM is reduced. Specific modes of the transmission command will be described later.

  The winning combination number is “0” until the bonus winning combination is won, and when the bonus winning combination is won by lottery, the winning combination winning number is “1” until the bonus winning combination is won, and it is assigned to the predetermined address of the RWM. “1” is stored (from “0” to “1”). Further, when either a re-playing role or a winning combination (including a loser) is won by lottery, any one of “0” to “39” is stored in an address different from the address storing the winning number of the bonus combination. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), the re-games -A to T are associated with any of the ten condition devices of re-games 01 to 10, and the wins -A to S are won. Any one of 33 types of condition devices 01 to 33 is associated. Further, except for the winning-M, a plurality of condition devices are associated with each re-playing combination and winning combination. When a winning combination associated with a plurality of condition devices is won, the combination of symbols arranged on the winning line L differs according to the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switch described later (details will be described later). In addition, unlike the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination, the condition device corresponding to each re-game combination and winning combination operates only during the game in which the corresponding winning combination is determined, and ends the operation when the game ends. To do.

  Next, symbol combinations associated with each condition device are shown in FIGS. FIG. 6A shows a symbol combination associated with the condition device BB01, and FIG. 6B shows a symbol combination associated with the condition device replays 01-10. Moreover, FIGS. 7-9 shows the symbol combination matched with winning 01-33. As shown in these figures, each condition device is associated with one or more symbol combinations, and when any of the associated symbol combinations is complete, the corresponding winning combination wins. Become.

  For example, when the symbol combination corresponding to BB01 is prepared, the bonus game starts from the next game, and when the symbol combination corresponding to any of the replays 01 to 10 is prepared, the regame is performed. Further, when a symbol combination corresponding to any one of the winning prizes 01 to 10 is prepared, a predetermined number of medals are paid out. Here, as shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning prizes 01 to 04 and 33 are prepared, nine pieces are awarded, and when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning prizes 05 to 14 is arranged, one piece is awarded. 8 when the symbol combinations corresponding to 15-26 are complete, 2 when the symbol combinations corresponding to winnings 27-29 are aligned, and 5 when the symbol combinations corresponding to winnings 30-32 are aligned Medals are paid out.

  In the following, when the symbol combination is expressed in words, the symbol names in each reel are written in the order of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, and are enclosed in square brackets. For example, the symbol combination corresponding to “1” of the replay 04 shown in FIG. 6B is expressed as “bell-red 7-watermelon A”.

(Explanation of freeze control means)
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the freeze control unit 120 executes a so-called freeze effect that delays the progress of the game after the start switch 36 is operated. The execution timing of the freeze effect in the present embodiment is from when the start switch 36 is operated until the reel starts to rotate, or after the reel starts to rotate until the stop switch operation can be accepted. , Until the operation of each stop switch from when the operation of the stop switch can be accepted, until the next game can be started after the rotation of all reels is stopped, etc. is there.

  Further, in this embodiment, as a freeze effect, an effect (reel effect) for improving the fun of the game is provided by appropriately rotating the reels 40L, 40C, 40R, and the freeze control means 120 provides the freeze effect. In addition to determining whether or not to execute, the type of reel effect to be executed may also be determined. The types of reel effects include, for example, rotating the reel in the opposite direction to normal rotation, rotating the reel by a predetermined number of symbols to display a specific symbol combination, or stopping a predetermined reel among a plurality of reels. It is conceivable to put other reels into a rotating state, change the rotation speed of the reels, or change the operation of the reels according to the player's operation. The predetermined conditions for executing the freeze by the freeze control means 120 include that a predetermined result is obtained by lottery, that a game advantageous to a player such as a bonus game or an AT game has started, or these For example, the game is over.

  The freeze period during which the freeze effect is performed is set after the elapse of a so-called wait period (the shortest time from when the reel starts rotating in the previous game until the reel can start rotating in the next game, for example, 4.1 seconds). Alternatively, it may be set including the wait period. When the wait period is included, it is determined whether the freeze effect ends during the wait period, and when it is ended, the freeze period is set after the wait period has elapsed, or the remaining wait period after the freeze effect ends. The mode which restarts is mentioned. Alternatively, such a determination process can be omitted by providing a freeze period longer than the wait period in advance.

  As the freeze effect, a pseudo game effect may be performed as if a normal game is in progress. In the pseudo game effect, a freeze effect period is defined between the start switch receiving process and the reel rotation start process based on the operation of the start switch. During the freeze effect period, the start switch is operated like a normal game. The reel rotation control is performed based on the above, and the reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the stop switches 37L, 37C, 37R. However, during the pseudo game effect, the winning combination lottery process based on the operation of the start switch 36 and the all reel winning determination process or the payout control process are not performed based on the operation of the stop switches 37L, 37C, 37R.

  In the pseudo game effect, a motion of swinging up and down may be performed at a timing when the stop switch 36 is operated, a timing when a specific reel rotates, or a timing when all reels stop. This makes it possible to determine whether the game is a normal game or a pseudo game effect. In addition, when a specific symbol combination is aligned on the winning line L in the pseudo game effect, the specific symbol combination is aligned on the winning line L when the pseudo game effect is finished and the game returns to the original game. In this case, it is preferable that the relative angle between the reels is not maintained. In order to realize this, for example, when the reels are rotated again after the pseudo game effect is finished, the rotation start timing may be randomly delayed between the reels.

(Description of reel control means)
The reel control unit 130 drives and controls stepping motors 42L, 42C, and 42R that rotate / stop the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R. That is, the rotation of the stepping motors 42L, 42C, and 42R is started based on the operation of the start lever 36 by the player, and when the rotation speeds of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R reach the above-described constant speed, the following constants are set. Maintain speed. When any of the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R is operated, stop control is performed on the reel (more precisely, the stepping motor) corresponding to the operated stop switch.

  At this time, the reel control means 130 stops the rotation of the corresponding reel within 190 milliseconds after the stop switch is operated. As a result, if the reels with 20 symbols on each reel as in this embodiment are stopped from rotating at a constant speed (80 rotations / minute) within 190 milliseconds, the reels will be 80 (rotation). / 60 (seconds) × 0.19 (seconds) × 20 (symbol) = about 5.067 It is sufficient to stop the reels until the pattern is rotated. However, the reel control means 130 does not stop the symbols that are passing through the middle stage M of the display window 22 when the stop switch is operated, in the middle stage M (that is, a margin for almost one symbol is provided at the maximum). . For this reason, when the stop switch is operated, any symbol from the symbol positioned upstream one of the symbols passing through the middle M to the symbol positioned four upstream is moved to the middle M. Can be stopped. Here, the range of “from the symbol positioned upstream one of the symbols passing through the middle stage M to the symbol positioned four upstream when the stop switch is operated” is the “stop control range”. Also called.

  When any winning number is determined by the winning combination determining unit 110, the reel control unit 130 stops the rotation of the reel so that the symbol combination of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number stops on the winning line L. (So-called pull-in control is performed). However, when the symbol constituting the winning symbol combination is not within the stop control range, the reels are stopped so as to prevent a winning other than the winning symbol from winning (so-called kicking control is performed).

  Further, among the replays -A to T (winning numbers 1 to 20), winnings -A to J (winning numbers 21 to 30) and winnings -P to R (winning numbers 36 to 38) shown in FIG. When the winning combination is determined, a condition device (hereinafter referred to as “the order combination”) corresponding to the symbol combination subject to the pull-in control in accordance with the operation sequence of the stop switches 37L, 37C, 37R (hereinafter also referred to as “push order”). "Condition devices subject to pull-in control"). That is, for example, when the first condition device and the second condition device are activated when a winning combination is determined by lottery, the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R are operated in the first pushing order. The symbol combination corresponding to the first condition device is the target of the pull-in control, and when operated in the second pressing order, the symbol combination corresponding to the second condition device is the target of the pull-in control.

  Here, FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 show the relationship between the winning combination and the condition device that is the target of the pull-in control according to the pressing order. FIG. 10 shows the relationship between the pushing order when the re-game player is won and the condition device that is the target of the pull-in control, and FIG. 10 (a) shows the re-games that can be won in non-RT and RT 1 It shows the relationship between the pressing order related to H (replay-B may be won only at RT1) and the condition device subject to the pull-in control. In RT5, re-games -C to H can be won in the same manner as in non-RT, but in RT5, the symbol combination corresponding to re-game 01 is always subject to the pull-in control regardless of the pressing order. FIG. 10 (b) shows re-games that can be won at RT2, -I to N. FIG. 10 (c) shows re-games that can be won at RT3 and RT4-A, OT (re-game-A is at RT4). The relationship between the pressing order and the condition device subject to the pull-in control is shown. FIG. 11 shows the relationship between the pushing order related to the winnings -A to J and P to R and the condition device that is the target of the pull-in control.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), when the re-game-B is won when the RT state is RT1, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 01 is drawn in when the left or middle stop switch is first stopped. It becomes the object of. On the other hand, when the first stop operation of the right stop switch 37R is performed, the pull-in control is performed on the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 09 in the order of pressing right → left → middle. However, when the stop switch is operated at a timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to replay 09 on the right reel ("red 7" symbol) cannot be aligned on the winning line L (so-called failure to press), Withdrawal control is performed for the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 01.

  In the order of pressing from right to middle to left, the pull-in control is performed for the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 10. However, when the red reel fails to push the “red 7” symbol, the pull-in control is performed for the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 01. In addition, when the right reel has succeeded in pushing the “Red 7” symbol, but the middle reel has failed to push the “Red 7” symbol, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 09 is used in the subsequent stop operation. Pull-in control is performed for the “bell” symbol of the middle reel and the “red 7” symbol or “watermelon A” symbol of the left reel.

  When the re-games -C to H are won in the non-RT or RT1, the symbol combination corresponding to one of the re-games 01, 02, and 05 is subject to the pull-in control according to the pressing order. In particular, when re-games -C to F are won, if the stop switches 37L, 37C, 37R are operated in one specific push order out of six push orders, the symbol combination corresponding to re-play 05 Pull-in control is performed for. Further, when the re-game-G or H is won, the pull-in control is performed for the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 05 when the first stop operation is performed on the right stop switch.

  Next, at RT2, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), when re-games -I to N are won, the symbol combination corresponding to one of the re-games 01, 02, and 06 is the pull-in control according to the pressing order. It becomes a target. In particular, when the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R are operated in one specific push order out of six push orders, the pull-in control is performed for the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 06. In RT4, as shown in FIG. 10 (c), when the re-game-A is won, the pull-in control is performed for the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 01 regardless of the pressing order. In RT3 and RT4, when re-games -OT are selected, the symbol combination corresponding to one of the re-games 01, 03, 04, 06, and 08 is subject to the pull-in control in accordance with the pressing order. In particular, when the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R are operated in one specific pressing order out of six pressing orders, the pull-in control is performed for the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 08.

  In addition, when a re-gamer is elected in non-RT and RT1-5, one of the re-game players will always win and a loss will occur, although the condition devices subject to the pull-in control will differ depending on the push order There is no.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11, when winning -A is won in non-RT and RT1 to 5 (that is, RT states other than RT6), when it is reverse-pressed (right → middle → left), winning 02 Pull-in control is performed for the corresponding symbol combination, and pull-in control is performed for the symbol combination corresponding to winning 01 when the other pressing order is made. That is, the winning number 21 is a winning combination in which 9 winning combinations are won in any order. In addition, when winnings -B to G are won, if the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R are operated in one specific pressing order among the six pressing orders, the winning switches 01 to 03 are activated. The symbol combination corresponding to the existing condition device becomes the target of the pull-in control, and as a result, nine winning combinations win. In addition, when operated in a pressing order other than a specific pressing order, a symbol combination corresponding to a conditional device (one of winning prizes 05 to 08) having one medal payout number among the activated conditional devices is a pull-in control. It becomes a target.

  Here, the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination in which medals are paid out when they are aligned on the winning line L is handled as a role corresponding to the number of payouts. Thus, for example, winning prizes 01 to 04 and 33 are also referred to as nine winning combinations because nine medals are paid out when the corresponding symbol combinations are prepared. Similarly, winnings 05 to 14 are also referred to as one winning combination, winnings 15 to 26 are referred to as eight winning combinations, winnings 27 to 29 are referred to as two winning combinations, and winnings 30 to 32 are referred to as five winning combinations.

  When winning -H to J is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the operating condition device among winnings 01 to 03 is subject to the pull-in control according to the type of the stop switch operated for the first stop. . That is, when the first stop operation is performed on the left stop switch 37L when the winning-H is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 01 is subject to the pull-in control, and when the winning-I is won, the middle stop switch 37C is When the one stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 02 becomes the target of the pull-in control, and when the right stop switch 37R is operated for the first stop when the winning-J is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 03 is the pull-in control. It becomes the object of.

  When winning -B to J are won, either the 9-piece winning combination or the 1-sheet winning combination will be won, and no oversight will occur.

  Next, when winnings -P to R are won, if a predetermined stop switch is operated for the first stop, any eight winning combinations will win, but a stop switch other than the predetermined stop switch performs the first stop operation. Then, depending on the operation timing of the stop switch operated after that, the combination of 8 sheets is missed. Specifically, when the winning stop -P is won and the left stop switch 37L is operated for the first stop, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 15 to 18 becomes the target of the pull-in control, so any one of these It will surely be complete.

  On the other hand, when the middle stop switch 37C is operated for the first stop, the winning combination 19, and when the right stop switch 37R is operated for the first stop, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 23 is the target of the pull-in control. For this reason, the stop switch operated thereafter stops at the position of the winning line L (middle stage M) if the symbols constituting these symbol combinations are not operated when the symbols are positioned within the aforementioned stop control range. It is not possible to make it, and the eight-piece combination (winning 19 or 23) is missed.

  For example, when the middle stop switch 37C is operated for the first stop, the “bell” symbol is stopped at the position of the winning line L (middle stage M) regardless of the operation timing, and then the right stop switch 37R is “red 7”. If the second stop operation is performed when the symbol is within the stop control range, the “red 7” symbol is stopped at the position of the winning line L (middle stage M). On the other hand, when the second stop operation is performed when the “red 7” symbol is not located within the stop control range, the “replay B” symbol stops at the position of the winning line L (middle stage M). (Refer to “specific symbol 02” in FIG. 12. Details will be described later.), The eight-piece combination (winning prize 19) is missed.

  Similarly, the middle stop switch 37C is won when the winning-Q is won, the right stop switch 37R is won when the winning-R is won, and any of the eight winning combinations is won by the first stop operation. When the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch, there is a possibility that the combination of eight sheets may be missed depending on the operation timing of the stop switch operated thereafter. Here, a special symbol combination that may be stopped and displayed on the winning line L when the winning combination -P to R is won and the eight winning combinations are missed will be described with reference to FIG.

  In this figure, the special symbol 01 has four types of symbol combinations, and when the winning-Q or R is won and the left stop switch 37L is first stopped, the operation timing of the stop switch operated thereafter Depending on the situation, any of these four types of symbol combinations may be stopped and displayed on the winning line L. In addition, there are two types of symbol combinations in the special symbol 02, depending on the operation timing of the stop switch operated after the winning stop -P or R is won and the middle stop switch 37C is first stopped. One of these two types of symbol combinations may be stopped and displayed on the winning line L. There are two types of symbol combinations in the special symbol 03. Depending on the operation timing of the stop switch operated after the winning stop -P or Q is won and the right stop switch 37R is operated for the first stop, these two symbols 2 Any of the types of symbol combinations may be stopped and displayed on the winning line L. As will be described in detail later, special symbols 01 to 03 shown in FIG. 12 relate to the transition of the RT state.

  For winnings -K to O and S, the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination that is subject to the pull-in control does not change depending on the pressing order of the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R. That is, in the winnings -K and L, depending on the operation timing of the stop switch, any one of winnings 07 to 08 and winnings 27 to 29 is subject to the pull-in control. In addition, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the winnings 27 to 29 are stopped on the winning line L, any of the straight lines including the winning line L (winning 27 is a middle horizontal line, winning 28 is Since the "watermelon A" or "watermelon B" symbols are aligned in a straight line on the line going up to the right and the winning line 29 is the lower horizontal line), it is also called a watermelon role. .

  In addition, when winning-N is won, the symbol combination corresponding to winning 30 is the target of the pull-in control as in winning-M. However, if the left stop switch 37L is operated at a timing at which both the “watermelon A” symbol and the “cherry” symbol can be stopped at the middle stage M, and the winning-M is won, “watermelon A” The symbol is stopped at the middle M, and when the winning-N is won, the “cherry” symbol is stopped at the middle M. Furthermore, when the left stop switch 37L is operated at a timing at which both the “BAR” symbol and the “Cherry” symbol can be stopped at the middle stage M, the “BAR” symbol is selected when the winning-M is won. Stop at the middle stage M, and if the winning -N is won, stop the “Cherry” symbol at the middle stage M.

  When the left stop switch 37L is operated at a timing when the “BAR” symbol, the “watermelon A” symbol, and the “cherry” symbol can be stopped at the middle stage M, when the winning-M is won, The “Watermelon A” symbol is stopped at the middle row M, and the “Cherry” symbol is stopped at the middle row M when the winning-N is won. When the left stop switch 37L is operated at a timing at which both the “BAR” symbol and the “watermelon A” symbol can be stopped at the middle stage M, when the winning-M is won, the “watermelon A” symbol is selected. Is stopped at the middle stage M, and when the winning-N is won, the “BAR” symbol is stopped at the middle stage M. The winnings -M and N are also called cherry roles because the winning 30 is activated and the "cherry" symbol may stop on the winning line L in the left reel 40L and the middle reel 40C. Is called a weak cherry and winning-N is called a strong cherry.

  When winning -O is won, the symbol combination constituted by symbols that can be stopped on the winning line L among the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 07 or 08 according to the operation timing of the stop switch Target. Here, the symbol combination (also referred to as “spilling eyes”) displayed when the symbol combinations corresponding to the winnings 07 and 08 cannot be aligned when winning -O is won is also referred to as “chance eyes”. . When Winning-S is won, pull-in control is performed for the symbol combinations corresponding to 9 winning combinations (winning 01-04 and winning 33).

(Description of game state control means)
The gaming state control unit 140 includes a lottery state control unit 142, a mode control unit 144, and a notification game control unit 146, and the winning probability of the lottery performed by the winning combination determining unit 110, the re-game player or the winning combination is won. In some cases, the state of whether or not to report the push order in which a game result advantageous to the player is obtained is controlled. The lottery state control means 142 controls the transition of the RT state described above. As shown in the state transition diagram of FIG. 13, in the non-RT which is the initial state, the special symbols 01 to 03 shown in FIG. If any one of them is stopped and displayed on the winning line L, the lottery state control means 142 shifts the RT state to RT1. Further, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 05 are prepared, the RT state is shifted to RT2.

  In RT1, when the symbol combination corresponding to replay 05 is completed, the lottery state control unit 142 shifts the RT state to RT2, and in RT2, when the symbol combination corresponding to replay 06 is aligned, the RT state is shifted to RT3. In RT3, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 08 are completed, the RT state is shifted to RT4. In RT2-4, when the symbol combinations corresponding to special symbols 01-03 are complete, the RT state is shifted to RT1. In RT2, the RT state is shifted to RT1 when the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 02 are completed, and in RT3 and RT, the RT state is shifted to RT1 when the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 04 are aligned. In RT4, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 06 are completed, the RT state is shifted to RT3.

  In the non-RT and RT1 to RT4, when BB01 is determined as a winning combination by the winning combination determining means 110 and the symbol combinations corresponding to BB01 are not prepared, the RT state is shifted to RT5. Further, when the symbol combinations corresponding to BB01 are prepared in the non-RT and RT1 to RT1, the RT state is shifted to RT6. When the total number of paid-out medals exceeds 450 in RT6, the game shifts to non-RT, and the winning combination determining means 110 performs lottery in non-RT from the next game. In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination corresponding to BB01 is not prepared in the game in which BB01 is determined to be the winning combination, the transition is made from non-RT and RT1 to RT5, but not limited to this. When a specific combination (for example, BB01) is determined to be a winning combination, the transition from non-RT and RT1 to RT5 may be performed.

  The mode control means 144 controls the transition of the state (main mode) relating to whether or not to notify the push order in which a game result advantageous to the player is obtained when a re-game player or a winning combination is won. Here, in this embodiment, there are four main modes 1 to 4 and, as shown in FIG. Note that the main mode 1 is stayed in the initial state. In the main mode 1, the high-precision mode transition lottery is performed, and when the high-precision mode transition lottery is won, the main mode 2 is entered. Further, when 20 games are played after shifting to the main mode 2, the mode shifts to the main mode 1. It should be noted that the transition from the main mode 2 to the main mode 1 can be set in various conditions such as a lottery based on the winning combination and another lottery (falling lottery) not based on the winning combination.

  While staying in the main mode 1 and 2, the CZ lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the chance zone (hereinafter also referred to as “CZ”) state, although it is basically in the normal state. When winning, it shifts from the normal state to the CZ state. In this CZ state, the probability of performing an AT lottery described later is high. The probability of winning the AT lottery is higher in the main mode 2 than in the main mode 1. Further, during the stay in the main mode 1 or 2, an AT lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the AT is performed, and when the AT lottery is won, the mode shifts to the main mode 3 (AT precursor state). Then, when a predetermined number of games is performed in the main mode 3, the process shifts to the main mode 4 and a push order flag described later is turned on, and the above-described push order is notified. Note that when the AT lottery is won, the main mode 4 may be immediately shifted to without passing through the main mode 3. In addition, the “predetermined number of games” staying in the main mode 3 may be a predetermined number of games or a number of games determined by random number lottery.

While staying in the main mode 4, the AT is first being prepared, and the AT game is started when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the main mode 4 (when the AT lottery is won). Specific AT start conditions and notification modes are as follows depending on the RT state.
(A) When the current RT state is non-RT In order to stop and display the symbol combination of the replay 05, at least when the replay-C to H are won, the push order in which the replay 05 wins is notified. Further, in order to stop and display the specific symbols 01 to 03, the pressing order is not notified when at least winning prizes -P, Q, and R are won. In addition, when winning -B to G and winning -H to J are won, the pressing order may be notified or may not be notified. However, when the winning order is notified when the winning combination is won, it is preferable that the payout rate is set to less than 100% even when notification is performed. Further, when the payout rate exceeds 100%, it is preferable not to notify the pressing order even when these winning combinations are won.

  Here, when the re-games -C to H are won, the AT game is started when the player makes a mistake in the push order even though the push order for stopping the re-play 05 is notified. It is preferable to do so. This is to prevent delaying the start of the AT game as much as possible (prolonging the AT preparation state) by operating the stop switch so that the player does not intentionally win the replay 05. Also, if it is a specification to notify the pushing order when winning -B to G, winning -H to J, winning -P to R is won, if the player has made a mistake in the notified pushing order, It is not necessary to start the AT game. This is because it does not correspond to the act of increasing the number of games until the AT game is started. In addition, regardless of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state, the AT game may be started uniformly from the game in which the re-games -C to H are won or from the next game in which the re-games -C to H are won.

(B) When the current RT state is RT1 In order to stop and display the symbol combination of the replay 05, at least when the replay-C to H are won, the push order in which the replay 05 wins is notified. When winning -B to G, winning -H to J, winning -P to R are won, the pressing order may be notified or may not be notified. However, when the winning order is notified when the winning combination is won, it is preferable that the payout rate is set to less than 100% even when notification is performed. Further, when the payout rate exceeds 100%, it is preferable not to notify the pressing order even when these winning combinations are won.

  Here, when the re-games -C to H are won, the AT game is started when the player makes a mistake in the push order even though the push order for stopping the re-play 05 is notified. It is preferable to do so. This is to prevent delaying the start of the AT game as much as possible (prolonging the AT preparation state) by operating the stop switch so that the player does not intentionally win the replay 05. Also, if it is a specification to notify the pushing order when winning -B to G, winning -H to J, winning -P to R is won, if the player has made a mistake in the notified pushing order, It is not necessary to start the AT game. This is because it does not correspond to the act of increasing the number of games until the AT game is started. In addition, regardless of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state, the AT game may be started uniformly from the game in which the re-games -C to H are won or from the next game in which the re-games -C to H are won.

(C) When the current RT state is RT2 In order to stop and display the symbol combination of the replay 06, at least when the replays -I to N are won, the push order in which the replay 06 wins is notified. In addition, when winnings -P to R are won, the pressing order for not displaying the specific symbols 01 to 03 is notified. In addition, when winning -B to G and winning -H to J are won, the pressing order may be notified or may not be notified. When the winning order is notified when these winning combinations are won, it is preferable that the payout rate is set to less than 100% even when notification is given. When the payout rate exceeds 100%, it is preferable not to notify the pressing order even when these winning combinations win.

  Here, when the re-games -I to N are won, the AT game is started when the player makes a mistake in the push order even though the push order for stopping the re-play 06 is notified. It is preferable to do so. This is to prevent delaying the start of the AT game as much as possible (prolonging the AT preparation state) by operating the stop switch so that the player does not intentionally win the replay 06. Also, if it is a specification to notify the pushing order when winning -B to G and winning -H to J are won, AT game will not start if the player makes a mistake in the notified pushing order. May be. This is because it does not correspond to the act of increasing the number of games until the AT game is started. Further, the AT game may be started uniformly from the game won by the replays I to N or from the next game won by the replays I to N, regardless of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state.

(D) When the current RT state is RT3 In order to stop and display the symbol combination of the replay 08, at least when the replay -O to T is won, the push order in which the replay 08 wins is notified. In addition, when winnings -P to R are won, the pressing order for not displaying the specific symbols 01 to 03 is notified. In addition, when winning -B to G and winning -H to J are won, the pressing order may be notified or may not be notified. When the winning order is notified when these winning combinations are won, it is preferable that the payout rate is set to less than 100% even when notification is given. When the payout rate exceeds 100%, it is preferable not to notify the pressing order even when these winning combinations win.

  Here, when the re-games -O to T are won, the AT game is started when the player makes a mistake in the push order even though the push order for stopping the re-play 08 is notified. It is preferable to do so. This is to prevent delaying the start of the AT game as much as possible (prolonging the AT preparation state) by operating the stop switch so that the player does not intentionally win the replay 08. Also, if it is a specification to notify the pushing order when winning -B to G and winning -H to J are won, AT game will not start if the player makes a mistake in the notified pushing order. May be. This is because it does not correspond to the act of increasing the number of games until the AT game is started. In addition, regardless of the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state, the AT game may be started uniformly from the game where the re-game-OT is won or from the next game where the re-game-OT is won.

(E) When the current RT state is RT4 The AT game is started from the next game in which the AT preparation is completed or from the next game in which the AT precursor has ended without passing through the AT preparation.

  As described above, basically, the AT game is started based on the winning of the re-gamer whose RT state shifts (an AT flag described later is updated to ON). When one of the re-games -O to T is elected, the AT game is started. When the re-game -O to T is elected, the push order for shifting the RT state to RT4 is notified. Therefore, if the player operates the stop switch in accordance with the notification, the player can move to RT4. Because it will not be.

  When the AT game start condition is not that one of the re-games OT is won, for example, “Move to RT4”, the push order for moving the RT state to RT4 is notified. Nevertheless, if the player plays a game without following it, the AT game will not start at all. In this case, in this embodiment, if the user is staying in the main mode 4, even if the AT game is not started, the push order is notified when one of the winning prizes -A to J and P to R is won (however, As mentioned above, it is not necessary to notify in the case of the specification where the payout rate exceeds 100% by notifying the pushing order. Therefore, the player does not follow the notification of the push order when any of the re-games -O to T is won, but the push order when any of the winning prizes -A to J and P to R wins. By following the notification, the maintenance period of the game medium while remaining in the main mode 4 is maintained, or the AT game is added during the AT preparation, or the AT type is changed (from the low continuation AT to the high continuation AT). ), Etc., there is a risk that the intended payout rate may be exceeded (so-called capture element).

  In the present embodiment, even if any of the replays -OT is not won, when the push order is notified (when the push order flag is on), the notified push order and Even if a different pressing order is performed, AT games may be started. Here, “when a pressing order different from the notified pressing order is performed” means that when the replay role performing RT transition is won, the stop operation is performed in a pressing order different from the pressing order notified by the player. Refers to the case. That is, since a player who has performed an operation in a pushing order different from the notification is likely not to follow the notified pushing order in the future, it waits for the AT game to start until the RT state shifts to RT4 (in other words, This is because it is not necessary to delay the timing at which the AT game end condition is satisfied. As described above, when a pressing order different from the notified pressing order is performed, the AT game starts even if the RT state is RT1 to RT3 (step S740 in FIG. 44 described later). (NO) → S742).

  During the AT game, a special zone lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the special zone is performed. When the special zone lottery is won, the special zone is being prepared and the special zone is entered. During this special zone, an AT game is always added for each game. Here, without adding an AT game every game during the specialized zone, for example, the addition may be performed more frequently than during an AT game. When a predetermined number of games (including the added number of games) is performed after the AT game is started, a transition lottery is performed, and the mode is shifted to either the main mode 1 or 2 according to the result.

  The transition lottery described above may be performed when shifting from the main mode 3 to 4, when the AT game is started and a predetermined number of games are performed, or at any timing therebetween. Also, instead of performing the transfer lottery, it is arranged according to the type of winning combination (one of the replays-O to T) from which AT games are to be started, or when these winning combinations are determined. The main mode 1 or 2 may be determined according to the symbol combination. Furthermore, instead of performing the transfer lottery, the user may return to the main mode where he / she stayed when winning the AT lottery.

  In the main mode 4 described above, the notification game control means 146 determines the push order to be notified to the player according to the winning combination, the determination of the push order number to be transmitted to the sub-control means 200 described later, and the AT game described above. Judgment of start / end of. Here, the relationship between the winning combination determined by the notification game control means 146 and the pressing order is shown in FIG. First, as the types of push order to be notified, six push orders (push order numbers 1 to 6) indicating stop switches from the first stop operation to the third stop operation, and stop switches for the first stop operation are shown. There are three push orders (push order numbers 7-9).

  In addition, there is a state of “unknown” that does not represent a specific push order because the push order is basically not notified, and this case is also treated as one of the push orders (push order number 0). . Here, in the case of “basically not informing the push order”, the user stays in the main mode 4 and the push order flag described later is on, but the main control means 100 does not determine the push order. If not (specifically, when a role that does not require notification of the pressing order is determined to be a winning combination, or when determining the pressing order to be notified by the sub-control means), or stay in the main mode 1 to 3 In some cases, the push order flag described later is turned off.

  In addition, the push order informed to the player is usually the push order in which a game result advantageous to the player can be obtained, but information in which part or all of the push order is concealed from the player is notified. In addition, a push order number used in a “push order hit game” in which a player places a push order in which an advantageous game result is obtained in that state is determined. Specifically, the first stop operation in the pushing order that provides an advantageous game result is the left stop switch 37L, the pushing order number 10 that conceals the stop switch after the second stop operation, and an advantageous game result is obtained. The first stop operation in the push order is the middle stop switch 37C, the push order number 11 in which the stop switch after the second stop operation is concealed, the first stop operation in the push order in which an advantageous game result is obtained is the right stop switch 37R. There is a pressing order number 12 that conceals the stop switch after the second stop operation. Further, a pressing order number 13 is also defined in which all stop switches to be operated for the first to third stop operations are concealed.

  The above-mentioned push order numbers are displayed on the acquired number display 28 by the main control means 100. Here, when the push order number is displayed on the acquired number display unit 28, as shown in FIG. 15A, seven segments (hereinafter also referred to as “upper digit”) of the acquired number display unit 28 are displayed. “=” Is displayed on the display, and the push order number is displayed on the 7-segment display of the first place (hereinafter also referred to as “lower digit”). Here, although the display mode of the push order numbers 0 to 9 is the numbers 0 to 9, the display mode of the push order number 10 is “A”, the display mode of the push order number 11 is “b”, The display mode of the order number 12 is “C”, and the display mode of the push order number 13 is “E”. Further, it is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 described later, and the sub-control means 200 notifies the push order corresponding to the received push order number.

  Next, the winning combination in which the push order number described above is notified will be described. As shown in FIG. 15 (a), for example, the winning combinations associated with the pressing order number 1 are replay-C, I, O and winning-B. If these winning combinations are determined, The order of pressing left → middle → right corresponding to the sequence number 1 is notified. As a result, for example, re-game-C may be determined as a winning combination when it is non-RT, RT1, or RT5 (see FIG. 4), but re-game-C is determined as a winning combination while staying at RT1. Suppose that the push order corresponding to the push order number 1 is notified. At this time, if the player operates the stop switch in the order of left → middle → right according to the notification, the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 05 are prepared (see FIG. 10A), so the RT state changes from RT1 to RT2. Transition (see FIG. 13). In addition, when winning-B is determined as a winning combination, if the stop switch is operated in the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order number 1, the symbol combinations corresponding to winning 01 (9 payouts) are aligned (see FIG. 11). ).

  In this way, for each pressing order number, if the stop switch is operated in that pressing order, there will be a combination of symbols that can shift to a more advantageous RT state, or a combination of symbols from which more medals will be paid out. The winning combination becomes. Depending on the winning combination, a pressing order number different from the corresponding pressing order number may be determined, and the pressing order corresponding to the determined pressing order number may be notified. For example, the push order number 6 may be determined when the re-play-C is decided as the winning combination, and the push order (right → middle → left) corresponding to the push order number 6 may be notified. At this time, when the player operates the stop switch in the order of right → middle → left in accordance with the notification, the symbol combinations corresponding to the re-game 01 are aligned (see FIG. 10A).

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the RT state is RT2-4, any one of the specific symbols 01-03 (symbol combinations that may be displayed when winning-P, Q, R is missed) is selected. Since it will shift to RT1 if it arranges, in Fig.15 (a), about winning-P-R, the pushing order (namely, left-first 1st stop operation, winning a prize which does not miss over) shown in FIG. 11 will not occur. -Q is associated with the pressing order number of the middle first stop operation, and the winning -R is the right first stop operation). However, when the RT state is non-RT, when the specific symbols 01 to 03 are prepared, the process proceeds to RT1, so when winning -P, Q, R is determined to be a winning combination while staying in non-RT, You may make it transmit to the sub-control means 200 the pushing order number corresponding to the pushing order in which any of special symbols 01-03 may be displayed.

  Also, depending on the winning combination, a pressing order number that is not to be notified is determined and transmitted to the sub-control means 200, so that the sub-control means 200 can notify the pressing order other than that corresponding to the received pressing order number. Good. In this case, since the push order notified by the sub-control means 200 and the push order number displayed on the obtained number display 28 described later are inconsistent, even if the push order flag is on, the obtained number display It is preferable not to display the pressing order number determined in 28. Of course, the determined push order number may be displayed on the acquired number display 28. In addition, for example, when a winning combination that does not change a privilege (start of a bonus game or replay, transition of RT state, number of medals paid out, etc.) given to a player by pressing order is determined. The sub-control unit 200 may determine the pressing order to be performed. In this case, the main control means 100 determines the push order number 0 corresponding to the unknown push order, transmits it to the sub-control means 200, determines the push order notified by the sub-control means 200, and determines the determined push order. You will be notified.

  In addition, if the stop switch for the first stop operation is the correct stop switch, the winning combination that does not change the bonus given to the player regardless of the stop switch for the second stop operation. When (for example, winning-H to J) is determined, a part of the pressing order to be notified may be determined by the sub-control means 200. In this case, the main control means 100 determines the push order number indicating the stop switch of the first stop operation and transmits it to the sub-control means 200, and the sub-control means 200 uses any stop switch as the stop switch of the second stop operation. The sub-control unit 200 determines the first stop operation stop switch corresponding to the received pressing order number, and the second stop operation stop switch determined by the sub-control unit 200 (second and third stop). It may be an operation stop switch). As described above, depending on the winning combination, the sub-control unit 200 performs the process of determining the pressing order to be notified, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control unit 100.

  As described above, the push order corresponding to the push order number described above is displayed on the acquired number display 28 by the main control means 100 as well as the sub-control means 200. In the example shown in FIG. 15 (a), “=” indicating that the display content is the push order number is displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28 as the push order number display mode. However, the display mode is not limited to this, and may be other display modes (for example, “−”). Other information may be displayed. Further, the pressing order number may be displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28, and it may be indicated that the lower digit is not displayed. Here, as a non-display mode, it is possible to turn off all the segments of the 7-segment display or display “0”.

  Information other than the information indicating that the push order number is displayed may be displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28. For example, as shown in FIG. 15B, the push order number (0-9, A, b, C, E) is displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display 28, and the winning combination is displayed in the upper digit. Or a winning combination may be displayed. For example, on the second-digit 7-segment display, segment C may be turned on when a re-playing winning combination is won, and may be turned off when a winning combination is won. In the example of FIG. 15B, the shaded portion is lit, and it is displayed that the re-game player is won and the push order number is 2.

  In addition, the acquired number display device 28 may notify an error. Therefore, in order to make it possible to identify whether the player or hall officials are informing the error or informing the operation order, for example, the second digit 7-segment display has an error It is preferable to distinguish between identification information that is displayed only and identification information that is displayed only when the operation order is notified. For example, when there is an error, the 7-segment display in the second digit may display “E”, “C”, “H”, “F”, but “0”-“ It is preferable to have a display mode such as “9” numeric information or “A”, “B”, “=” which is not displayed when an error occurs.

  In this embodiment, in response to the insertion of medals (including the case where the bet switches 34 and 35 are operated), the display of the acquired number display 28 is turned off (that is, all segments are turned off), and the start switch 36 is turned off. When the pressing order number is determined in accordance with the operation, the pressing order number is displayed. When the pressing order number is not determined, the light-off state or a predetermined display (for example, “0”) is maintained. When all the reels stop and the winning combination wins, the display is turned off and the payout number is displayed.

  Further, when displaying the push order number and the number of payouts using the acquired number display 28, “00” is displayed according to the insertion of medals (including the case where the bet switches 34 and 35 are operated), and the start switch When the push order number is determined according to the operation of 36, the push order number is displayed. When all the reels stop and the winning combination wins, the display is once returned to “00” and the number of payouts May be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to display “00” on the acquired number display 28 when a medal is inserted again. On the other hand, if the winning combination is not won, the display of the acquired number display 28 is returned to “00” when all reels are stopped until the push order number is determined in the next game. You may make it maintain the state.

  In the above two examples, before displaying the number of payouts, the display of the push order number is temporarily turned off or “00” is displayed. However, the display of the push order number is changed to the display of the payout number directly. May be. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, since the push order in which an advantageous game result can be obtained if the winning number is understood, the winning number may be displayed instead of the pushing order number.

  Next, FIG. 15C shows a display mode (lighting pattern) of the pressing order when four LED lamps LED1 to LED4 are separately provided on the front panel 20, for example, as a dedicated indicator for displaying the pressing order number. ). In this figure, the shaded portion indicates the lighting state of the LED. Here, when the extinguishing state is replaced with “0” and the lighting state is replaced with “1”, the lighting pattern of the LED1 to LED4 is a numerical value in binary notation indicating the pressing order number. If the push order numbers are only 0 to 7, the push order numbers may be expressed in binary numbers as in FIG. 15C using the bet number display lamps 26a, 26b, and 26c. Good.

  FIG. 15D shows an example in which a 7-bit numerical value (0 to 127) is displayed using one 7-segment display. As shown in this figure, the segments a to g are pressed to correspond to the bit 0 to 6 of the display data of the order number, and each segment is turned on or off, so that a 7-digit number (that is, 0 to 127) is expressed in binary. Press in the numerical range) to display the order number. In this case, for example, when the push order number 9 is displayed, the segments a and d are turned on. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, since the push order in which an advantageous game result can be obtained if the winning number is understood, the winning number may be displayed instead of the pushing order number. For example, when the winning number 28 is displayed, the segments c, d, and e are turned on. Further, when the push order number and the winning number can be displayed, if the display content is the push order number, the segment g is turned on, and if the displayed number is the winning number, the turn-off number is turned off. A 6-bit numerical value may be displayed.

  Next, with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 16, the display timing of the push order number by the main control means 100 and the push order notification timing based on the push order number by the sub control means 200 will be described. The push order number determined by the main control unit 100 is transmitted to the sub control unit 200 by a control command to be described later. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16A, first, the winning combination is determined according to the operation of the start switch 36, and the pressing order number corresponding to the determined winning combination is displayed on the acquired number display 28. Is done. Then, a push order number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 by a push order number command (a kind of control command), and the sub-control means 200 displays the push order corresponding to the received push order number on the image display device 70.

  In the present embodiment, after the push order number command is transmitted, a command based on the winning / replaying according to the determined winning combination (details will be described later) and the winning combination winning number command are sub-control means 200. The sub-control unit 200 displays the pressing order corresponding to the previously received pressing order number on the image display device 70 in the process based on the winning item winning number command. By doing so, the sub-control unit 200 does not need to perform processing based on the command every time any command is transmitted, and the processing load on the sub-control unit 200 can be reduced. The sub-control unit 200 may separately perform a process based on the push order number command, and display the push order corresponding to the push order number on the image display device 70 in the process based on the push order number command.

  The push order displayed on the image display device 70 is not displayed at the timing when the third stop operation is performed, but the push order number displayed on the acquired number display 28 is maintained and all reels are displayed. It disappears after stopping. The display order of the push order number displayed on the acquired number display unit 28 does not change until it is not displayed, but the display mode of the push order displayed on the image display device 70 is, for example, determined by the player. The display content may be changed each time the stop operation is performed.

  Further, as will be described later, the push order displayed on the image display device 70 is not displayed when a stop operation is performed in a push order different from the displayed push order, but is displayed on the acquired number display 28. The pressing order numbers are maintained and are not displayed after all reels have stopped rotating. It should be noted that the push order number displayed on the acquired number display 28 may also be hidden when a stop operation is performed in a push order different from the displayed push order. However, in this case, in order to eliminate the situation in which the push order is displayed only on the image display device 70, the push order displayed on the image display device 70 is hidden, and then displayed on the acquired number display 28. Although it is preferable to hide the pressed order number, the pressed order displayed on the image display device 70 and the pressed order number displayed on the acquired number display 28 may be hidden simultaneously, or the acquired number The pressing order number displayed on the display 28 may be hidden first.

  The push order number and the push order display timing shown in FIG. 16A are merely examples, and may be displayed, for example, at any of the timings shown in FIGS. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (b), the winning combination is determined according to the operation of the start switch 36, and the push order number corresponding to the determined winning combination is transmitted to the sub-control means 200. Then, the push order number is displayed on the acquired number display 28, and then the push order corresponding to the received push order number is displayed on the image display device 70 by the sub-control means 200. The sub-control means 200 may display the push order on the image display device 70 in the process based on the push order number command, or the image display apparatus in the process based on the accessory winning number command transmitted after the push order number command. The pressing order may be displayed on 70. The push order displayed on the image display device 70 at the timing when the third stop operation is performed is not displayed, and the push order number displayed on the acquired number display 28 is not displayed at the timing when all reels are stopped. Display.

  Unlike the present embodiment, when the control command transmission process and the display control process of the acquired number display unit 28 are performed by the timer interrupt process, for example, in the timer interrupt process in which the push order number is transmitted, The process of displaying the push order number on the display 28 may be performed so that the push order number is displayed on the acquired number display 28 earlier than the push order is displayed on the image display device 70. . Specifically, the timer interruption processing is performed in a processing order in which after the LED lighting control including the acquired number display device 28 and the like is executed, a control including a command including a push order number is executed to the sub-control means 200. It may be configured.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 16C, the main control unit 100 transmits a display completion command to the sub-control unit 200 in addition to the pressing order number, and the sub-control unit 200 presses the display completion command upon reception of the display completion command. Displays the push order based on the order number. First, the winning combination is determined according to the operation of the start switch 36, and the push order number corresponding to the determined winning combination is transmitted to the sub-control means 200. Then, when the push order number is displayed on the acquired number display device 28, a display completion command is transmitted to the sub-control means 200, so that the sub-control means 200 receives first in processing based on the display completion command. The push order corresponding to the push order number that has been displayed is displayed on the image display device 70. Then, the push order displayed on the image display device 70 at the timing when the third stop operation is performed is not displayed, and then the push order number displayed on the acquired number display 28 is not displayed at the timing at which all reels are stopped. Display.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, after the main control means 100 displays the push order number on the acquired number display 28, the sub control means 200 notifies the image display apparatus 70 of the push order. . Thereby, for example, even if the content of the push order number sent from the main control means 100 to the sub control means 100 is different from the original push order number for some reason, the wrong push order is notified. The player operates the stop switch based on the push order number displayed on the acquired number display 28 to obtain an advantageous game result, and does not suffer any disadvantage.

  Next, the timing shown in FIG. 16 (d) is different from the case of FIGS. 16 (a) to 16 (c) described above. The case where the order is displayed is shown. First, the winning combination is determined according to the operation of the start switch 36, and the push order number corresponding to the determined winning combination is transmitted to the sub-control means 200. The sub-control unit 200 displays the push order corresponding to the push order number on the image display device 70 before the push order number is displayed on the acquired number display 28. The sub-control means 200 may display the push order on the image display device 70 in the process based on the push order number command, or the image display apparatus in the process based on the accessory winning number command transmitted after the push order number command. The pressing order may be displayed on 70.

  On the other hand, the main control means 100 displays the push order number on the acquired number display 28 after the push order is displayed on the image display device 70. For example, the push order number is displayed on the acquired number display 28 when a predetermined time (time until the push order is displayed on the image display device 70) has passed since the push order number command was transmitted. Then, the push order displayed on the image display device 70 at the timing when the third stop operation is performed is not displayed, and then the push order number displayed on the acquired number display 28 is not displayed at the timing at which all reels are stopped. Display.

(Explanation of winning determination means)
Returning to FIG. 3, when all the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R are stopped, the winning determination means 150 corresponds to any of the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. It is determined whether or not to do. As a result, when it is determined that the bonus combination has been won, the bonus game starts from the next game, and when it is determined that the re-playing combination has won, the replay is performed in the next game, Is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning small combination is paid out. The payout of medals is performed by adding the number of medals corresponding to the winning small role to the current credit number until the upper limit value (for example, 50) of the number of credits is reached. After reaching 50), medals may be discharged from the medal payout opening 60 shown in FIG.

(Description of abnormality detection means)
The abnormality detection means 160 detects an abnormal state that may occur in the slot machine 10 during a game or a situation that obstructs the progress of the game, and detects the detected abnormality or failure (hereinafter also referred to as “error”). The corresponding error code is displayed on the acquired number display 28 and transmitted to the sub-control means 200 described later. FIG. 17 shows the types of errors detected by the abnormality detection unit 160. In this figure, the power failure recovery error (error code: E1) indicates that the contents of the RWM are not normal when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on (for example, the contents of the RWM when the power is shut off and the RWM when the power is turned on) This error is detected when the content of the message does not match (parity check error).

  The set value error (error code: E2) is an error detected when the set value stored in the RWM is outside the predetermined range (other than 1 to 6). Random number error (error code: E3) is that the frequency value of the random number generation clock (RCK) supplied to the random number generation means in the main control means 100 is half the frequency of the system clock (SCLK) supplied to the CPU. An error is detected when the value is less than. The medal insertion error (error code: C0) is an error detected when it is determined that the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 32 has abnormally passed based on the medal detection signal from the medal sensor described above. The medal retention error (error code: C1) is an error detected when the inserted medal continues to be detected over a predetermined time by the above-described medal sensor.

  The empty error (error code: CA) is an error detected when there are no medals stored in the bucket of the medal payout device. The door opening error (error code: Cb) is an error detected when the front door of the slot machine is opened. The payout error (error code: H0) is an error detected when an abnormal detection signal is output from the payout sensor 47 shown in FIG. The medal clogging error (error code: HP) is an error detected when a detection signal is output from the payout sensor 47 for a predetermined time. The medal full error (error code: FE) is detected when a predetermined amount of medals are stored in a medal auxiliary storage (a box for storing medals overflowing from the bucket of the medal payout device) provided in the slot machine 10. This is an error.

  Among the errors described above, the power recovery error is an error that can be detected when the slot machine 10 is turned on, and errors other than those errors are errors that can be detected during the game. Further, when each error is detected, the main control means slot machine 10 is controlled to a state where the game cannot be continued (hereinafter also referred to as “non-game state”). The restart method (return method) differs depending on the type of error.

  First, if the game is disabled due to a medal insertion error, medal retention error, empty error, door opening error, payout error, medal clogging error, or medal full error, the error factor is resolved and reset / The game control process can be resumed by operating the setting switch 93 (see FIG. 3). Thus, each error described above can be returned to the game by operating the reset / setting switch 93, and hence is referred to as a recoverable error. In the game resumed after the occurrence of the recoverable error, the gaming state when the error occurs is maintained. If the cause of the game disabled state is not resolved before returning to the game, the same error will be detected immediately after returning to the game disabled state again.

  Here, the gaming state includes, for example, an RT state (non-RT, one of RT1 to 6), a main mode state (any one of main modes 1 to 4), and various flag states (for example, a game progress main process described later). (States of various flags referred to in FIG. 27), various game numbers (for example, a chance zone game number, an AT precursor game number, an AT game number, etc.), a medal payout number value in a bonus game, and the like.

  On the other hand, when a power failure recovery error, a setting value error, or a random number error occurs, the slot machine 10 is turned off once, and a predetermined storage area for clearing the predetermined storage area of the RWM is cleared when the power is turned on again. It is necessary to perform an operation. That is, since these errors cannot be returned to the game by operating the reset / setting switch 93, they are referred to as non-recoverable errors. Here, the power failure recovery error is an error that can be detected immediately after the power is turned on (before the game progress main process described later is started), but the set value error and the random number error are errors that can be detected during the game. is there. The set value error may be configured to be detected for each timer interrupt process like a random number error, or at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing for executing a role lottery process or a timing for executing an AT lottery) ) May be configured to be detected.

  When an unrecoverable error occurs, the predetermined storage area of the RWM is cleared at the time of return, so the information regarding the gaming state stored in the storage area is not maintained, and the initial state (for example, non-RT and main mode) The game is resumed from 1 (non-AT). However, for example, when a random number error occurs during AT, it is severe for the player to resume the game from the non-RT and main mode 1 states. Therefore, the information necessary for restarting the AT after the return is stored in a storage area that is not subject to RWM clear, and the AT is being used based on the information stored in the storage area at the time of return. The game may be resumed from this state.

  As described above, when an error is detected, an error code corresponding to the detected error is displayed on the acquired number display 28 by the LED display control means 170 described later. When a recoverable error is detected, an error code corresponding to the error is transmitted to the sub-control unit 200 by the control command transmission unit 180 described later. Further, when a recoverable error is detected during reel rotation, the slot machine 10 is brought into a game-impossible state when all the reels are stopped according to the operation of the stop switches 27L, 27C, 27R. On the other hand, when a random number error (unrecoverable error) is detected during reel rotation, the slot machine 10 is put into a game disabled state by a timer interrupt process (described later) that is executed first after detection. .

(Description of LED display control means)
The LED display control means 170 includes the clearing display LED 22, the re-game display LED 23, the insertion possible display LED 24, the game start display LED 25, the credit number display 27, the acquired number display 28 shown in FIG. The display control of the set value display 81 shown in FIG. Here, the contents of the LED segment table A referred to by the LED display control means 170 when the display control of the 7-segment display constituting the credit amount display 27, the acquired number display 28 and the set value display 81 is performed. As shown in FIG.

  The LED segment table A is information stored in the ROM included in the main control means 100, and each segment a to g constituting the 7-segment display (see [Segment] in FIG. 18A). In other words, it can be said that the display mode of the 7-segment display is determined in advance. Hereinafter, this data is referred to as segment data. Further, symbols a to g shown in [Segment] in FIG. 18A are common to the respective segments of the 7-segment display constituting the credit number display 27, the acquired number display 28 and the set value display 81. And

  There are 16 segment data in the LED segment table A shown in FIG. 18A, and each segment data is stored in ROM addresses 1211H to 1220H. These segment data are 1-byte data, and each bit D0 to D6 when the data is expressed in binary corresponds to each segment a to g of the 7-segment display. That is, the least significant bit D0 corresponds to the segment a, the upper bit D1 corresponds to the segment b, and the bits D2 to D6 hereinafter correspond to the segments c to g, respectively. When the value of each bit is “0”, the corresponding segment is turned off, and when it is “1”, it is turned on. However, whether “1” is represented by a high level signal (for example, +5 V (volt)) or a low level signal (for example, ground potential) (in other words, whether it is active high or active low). May be determined as appropriate.

  Since the most significant bit D7 is not used for lighting control of the 7-segment display, all the most significant bits D0 of the segment data stored in the addresses 1211H to 1220H are “0”.

  For example, the segment data 3FH stored in the ROM address 1211H is expressed as “00111111” in binary, indicating that the segments a to f are turned on and the segment g is turned off. Therefore, the display mode is “0”. Similarly, segment data having display forms of numerals “1” to “9” are stored in the ROM addresses 1212H to 121AH, respectively. In addition, segment data having display forms of alphabets “A”, “b”, “C”, and “E” are stored in the addresses 121BH to 121DH, respectively. Further, segment data that displays the symbol “=” is stored in the address 121EH, and segment data in which all the segments are turned off is stored in the address 121FH.

  The LED display control means 170 manages segment data acquired from the LED segment table by using an offset value. This offset value indicates an address value based on the head address (1211H) of the LED segment table A. That is, if the offset value is “0”, segment data (3FH) of 1211H + 0H = 1121H is acquired, and if the offset value is “B”, segment data (77H) of 1211H + BH = 121CH is acquired. .

  Next, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22 whether lighting control of each display LED and the 7-segment display is performed using the segment data acquired from the LED segment table A. FIG. FIG. 19 is a wiring diagram showing the wiring among the main CPU 80 of the main control means 100, the output ports 0, 1, 4 and the setting display 81 arranged on the main control board. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pin assignments of the output ports 0, 1, and 4. FIG. 21 is a wiring diagram showing wiring between the display board 82 to which various signals output from the output ports 0, 1, and 4 are input, the display LEDs, and the 7-segment display. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the bit of data input to each 7-segment display and each segment and each display LED of the 7-segment display.

  In the wiring diagram of the main control board shown in FIG. 19, the main CPU 80 has three chip select signal output terminals XCS1 to XCS3 and 8-bit data output terminals D0 to D7. The output ports 0, 1, and 4 each include a clock input terminal CK, input terminals D0 to D7, and output terminals D0 to D7, and a signal input to the clock input terminal CK is turned on (high level) from off (low level). When the input signal changes, the input signals of the input terminals D0 to D7 are held and output from the output terminals D0 to D7. When the signal input to the clock input terminal CK changes from off (low level) to on (high level), the input signals of the input terminals D0 to D7 are held and output from the output terminals D0 to D7. Also good.

  The chip select signal output terminal XCS1 is the clock input terminal CK of the output port 0, the chip select signal output terminal XCS2 is the clock input terminal CK of the output port 1, and the chip select signal output terminal XCS3 is the clock input terminal of the output port 4. CK and each are connected. The data output terminals D0 to D7 of the CPU 80 are connected to the data input terminals D0 to D7 of the output ports 0, 1, and 4, respectively. However, since the bits D5 to D7 of the output port 0 and the bit D4 of the output port 4 are unused (NC), these data input terminals are connected to the ground.

  The data output terminals D0 to D4 of the output port 0 are connected to the third to seventh pins of the input connector CN of the display board 82 shown in FIG. In addition, the data output terminals D0 to D7 of the output port 1 are connected to the 8th to 15th pins of the input connector CN described above via the corresponding drive circuits. Further, the data output terminals D5 to D7 of the output port 4 are connected to the 16th pin to the 18th pin of the input connector CN described above via the corresponding drive circuits. The data output terminals D0 to D3 of the output port 4 are connected to the phases (φ0 to φ3) of the middle stepping motor 42C, but detailed illustration is omitted.

  The data output terminals D0 to D7 of the output port 1 are connected to the bases of pnp transistors included in the corresponding driving circuits. A voltage of +5 V is applied to the emitter of the transistor included in each drive circuit connected to the output port 1, and the collector is connected to the input connector CN of the display substrate 82. When a low level signal is supplied from the output terminal of the corresponding output port to the base of each transistor, the pnp type transistor of each drive circuit is turned on and current flows from the emitter to the collector, and the connection destination has a high level. Is applied.

  Data output terminals D0 to D7 of the output port 4 are connected to the bases of npn transistors included in the corresponding driving circuits. Further, the emitter of the transistor included in each drive circuit connected to the output port 4 is connected to the input connector CN of the display substrate 82, and the collector is connected to the ground. The npn transistors of each drive circuit are turned on when a high level signal is supplied from the output terminal of the corresponding output port to the base of each transistor, and current can flow from the collector to the emitter. The collector side goes low.

  As described above, the pnp transistor of the driving circuit is turned on when a low level signal is supplied to the base, and the npn transistor is turned on when a high level signal is supplied to the base. Therefore, whether data to be output to the output port is active high (positive logic) or active low (negative logic) may be appropriately determined according to the type of transistor.

  Furthermore, the output terminals D0 to D6 of the output port 1 are connected to the segments a to g of the set value display 81 through a drive circuit. More specifically, it is connected to the anode of the LED corresponding to the segments ag. On the other hand, the cathodes of the LEDs corresponding to the segments a to g are connected to the output terminal D4 of the output port 0.

  Note that output ports 2, 3, 5, and 6 for outputting other signals are also provided on the main control board, but in the wiring diagram shown in FIG. 19, signals relating to the 7-segment display and the display LED are output. Only the output ports 0, 1, and 4 are shown.

  Next, the contents of signals output from the output ports 0, 1, and 4 will be described with reference to FIG. First, from the output terminals D0 to D4 of the output port 0, a 7-segment display for performing display control and an LED digit signal designating a display LED (collectively referred to as “digits”) are output. In the present embodiment, digits 1 to 5 are defined. As shown in FIG. 22, digit 1 corresponds to the 7-segment display and the game start display LED 25 of the upper digit of the credit amount display 27, and digit 2 Corresponds to the 7-segment display of the lower digit of the credit amount display 27. Digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit 7-segment indicator and input enable display LED 24 of the acquired number indicator 28, and digit 4 corresponds to the lower-segment 7-segment indicator and replay display LED 23 of the acquired number indicator 28. To do. The digit 5 corresponds to the set value display 81 and the settlement display LED 22. Thereby, there are five LED digit signals, LED digits 1 to 5 (DG1 to 5), and the numbers written at the end of each signal name are associated with the digit numbers (1 to 5). .

  Next, on / off signals (LED segments a to g: SGa to g) for each segment of the 7-segment display designated by the LED digit signal are output from the output terminals D0 to D6 of the output port 1. Further, the output terminal D7 of the output port 1 outputs an on / off signal (LED segment p: SGp) of the display LED (see FIG. 22) designated by the LED digit signal.

  Further, the output terminals D0 to D3 of the output port 4 output excitation / non-excitation signals (medium stepping motors φ0 to φ3: Mφ0 to Mφ3) for the respective phases of the intermediate stepping motor 42C. Further, the output terminals D5 to D7 of the output port 4 output ON / OFF signals (1 to 3 sheet insertion display: IN1 to IN3) of the 1 sheet insertion display LED 26a, the 2 sheet insertion display LED 26b, and the 3 sheet insertion display LED 26c. Is done.

  Next, in the wiring diagram of the display board, each display LED, and the 7-segment display shown in FIG. The sheet insertion display LEDs 26a to 26c are connected to the respective anodes. In addition, the third pin (input signal DG1) of the input connector CN is connected to each LED included in the 7-segment display (the upper digit of the credit number display 27) of the digit 1 and the cathode of the game start display LED 25. . Further, the 4th pin (input signal DG2) of the input connector CN is connected to the cathode of each LED included in the 7-segment display (the lower digit of the credit number display 27) of the digit 2.

  Further, the fifth pin (input signal DG3) of the input connector CN is connected to the respective LEDs included in the 7-segment display (the upper digit of the acquired number display 27) of the digit 3 and the cathode of the input possible display LED 24. . The 6th pin (input signal DG4) of the input connector CN is connected to each LED included in the 7-segment display (the lower digit of the credit number display 27) of the digit 4 and the cathode of the replay display LED 23. The seventh pin (input signal DG5) of the input connector CN is connected to the cathode of the clearing display LED 22.

  Next, the 8th to 14th pins (input signals SGa to SGg) of the input connector CN are connected to the anodes of the LEDs corresponding to the segments a to g included in the 7-segment display of the digits 1 to 4. . For example, No. 8 (input signal SGa) of the input connector CN is connected to the anode of the LED corresponding to the segment a in each of the 7-segment displays of the digits 1 to 4. The 15th pin (input signal SGp) of the input connector CN is connected to each anode of the clearing display LED 22, the re-game display LED 23, the throwable display LED 24 and the game start display LED 25. Further, the 16th to 18th pins (input signals IN1 to IN3) of the input connector CN are connected to the anodes of the 1-sheet insertion display LED 26a, the 2-sheet insertion display LED 26b, and the 3-sheet insertion display LED 26c, respectively.

  In the wiring diagrams shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 21, the LED display control means 170 performs digit 1 → digit 2 → digit 3 → digit 4 → digit 5 → digit 1 →. As described above, so-called dynamic lighting control is performed by cyclically switching the 7-segment display and the display LEDs that are lit. Here, out of the corresponding digits 1 to 5 among the digits 1 to 5, the digit corresponding to the LED digit signal at a low level (for example, ground potential) can be turned on. Then, in the 7-segment display and the display LED corresponding to the digit in the lighting enabled state, the segment and the display LED to which the low level signal is supplied from the output terminals D0 to D7 of the output port 1 are turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 22, when the LED display control means 170 performs display related to the digit 1, the tenth digit value of the number of medals currently stored is displayed in the upper digit of the credit number display unit 27. Such a signal is output from the output terminals D0 to D6 of the output port 1. Here, when the number of credits is less than 10, 0 may be displayed, or all segments may be turned off. Further, when the display relating to the digit 2 is performed, a signal such that the value of the first place of the number of medals currently stored is displayed in the lower digit of the credit number display 27 is output to the output terminal D0 of the output port 1. Output from ~ D6.

  When displaying the digit 3, when the winning combination is won, a signal is displayed so that the tens value of the number of medals to be paid out is displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display 28. 1 from the output terminals D0 to D6. Here, if the medal payout number is less than 10, 0 may be displayed, or all segments may be turned off. Further, when the display relating to the digit 4 is performed, a signal is output so that when the winning combination wins, the first digit value of the number of medals to be paid out is displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display 28. 1 from the output terminals D0 to D6. In addition, when a small role is won by the role lottery, “0” is displayed when the winning small role cannot be won (when it is missed), and it is not displayed when it is lost in the role lottery. good. As a result, the player can identify whether he / she missed the small role or whether the result of the role lottery was lost. Further, when the display relating to the digit 5 is performed, a signal such that the value of the current set value is displayed on the set value display 81 is output from the output terminals D0 to D6 of the output port 1.

  The LED display control means 170 outputs a signal for turning on or off the game start display LED 25 from the output terminal D7 of the output port when displaying the digit 1, and outputs the signal when displaying the digit 3 When a signal for turning on / off the input enable display LED 24 is output from the output terminal D7 of the display, and when the display relating to the digit 4 is performed, a signal for turning on or off the replay display LED 23 is output from the output terminal D7 of the output port. 5 is output, a signal for turning on or off the clearing display LED 22 is output from the output terminal D7 of the output port.

  For example, when the display control of the 7-segment display (digit number 27 of the credit number display 27) and the display LED (game start display LED 25) of the digit 1 is performed, a low level signal is output from the output terminal D0 of the output port 0. Then, a high level (for example, +5 V) signal is output from the output terminals D1 to D4. Further, from the output terminals D0 to D6 of the output port 1, segment data (see FIG. 18A) indicating the display mode (any one of 0 to 5) corresponding to the tenth value of the current credit number is displayed. Based signal is output. For example, if the tens place value is “2”, a low level signal is output from the output terminals D0, D1, D3, D4, and D6 of the output port 1, and a high level signal is output from the output terminals D2 and D5. To do.

  As a result, the LED segment signals SGa, SGb, SGd, SGe, and SGg become high level (+ 5V), and + 5V is applied to the anodes of the LEDs of the segments a, b, d, e, and g in the 7-segment displays of the digits 1 to 5. Is applied. However, since a high level signal is output to the cathode of the 7-segment display with digits 2 to 5, no current flows through the LEDs of the segments a, b, d, e, and g, and all the segments are turned off. It becomes. On the other hand, since the cathode of the 7-segment display of digit 1 is at a low level, a current flows through each LED of segments a, b, d, e, and g, and the numeral “2” is lit. .

  At this time, since only the LED digit 1 signal DG1 is at a low level, the cathode of the game start display LED 25 is at a low level, and is turned on or off according to the level (high / low) of the LED segment g signal SGp. .

  Further, the LED display control means 170 displays not only the medal payout number on the acquired number display 28 but also the push order number shown in FIG. 15 and the error code corresponding to the abnormality detected by the abnormality detecting means 160 described above. Here, when displaying the number of credits, the number of payouts, the push order number, and the error code, the segment data of the LED segment table A shown in FIG. When the error codes of various errors shown in FIG. 17 are displayed on the acquired number display 28 with reference to the LED segment table A shown in FIG. 18A, a power failure recovery error (error code: E1), setting Value error (error code: E2), random number error (error code: E3), medal insertion error (error code: C0), medal retention error (error code: C1), empty error (error code: CA), and door An open error (error code: Cb) is displayed (see “Table A” column in FIG. 17).

  On the other hand, for the payout error (error code: H0), medal clogged error (error code: HP), and medal full error (error code: FE), the segment data of the display mode corresponding to the error code is LED segment table A. These error codes cannot be displayed on the acquired number display 28. However, if the error shown in FIG. 17 is detected, the error code (including errors not displayed on the acquired number display 28) is transmitted to the sub-control means 200, and the image display device 70, speakers 64L, 64R, etc. Thus, notification corresponding to the detected error is performed.

  Instead of the LED segment table A, an LED segment table B shown in FIG. 18B may be used. The LED segment table B shown in FIG. 18B includes a first table similar to the LED segment table A and a second table including 16 types of segment data stored in ROM addresses 1311H to 1320H. . The segment data of the second table indicates numbers “0” to “3” and alphabets “F”, “P”, “A”, “b”, “C”, “H”, “E”. It is a display mode.

  As a result, when an error code is displayed on the acquired number display 28 based on the second table, the error code is also acquired for a payout error, medal clogged error and medal full error that could not be displayed in the LED segment table A. The number can be displayed on the number indicator 28 (see the “Table B” column in FIG. 17). In other words, by using the LED segment table for error code display, the number of display modes that can be displayed on the 7-segment display can be increased, so that error codes are displayed in a display mode that makes it easy to recognize the type of error that has occurred. can do.

  The LED segment table B shown in FIG. 18B is divided into a first table for displaying the pressing order number, the number of credits, and the number of payouts, and a second table for displaying an error code. For example, it may be divided into an LED segment table (third table) for displaying an error code and a push order number, and an LED segment table (fourth table) for displaying the number of payouts and the number of credits. In this case, the third table may include the segment data of the display mode that is displayed only when the push order number is displayed.

  Next, when the LED display control means 170 performs the lighting control of each 7-segment display and display LED shown in FIGS. 19 and 21, the data acquired from the RWM of the main control means 100 and the data are stored. The address will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the RAM used in this embodiment can store 1 byte of data at each address. Also, all the address values shown in FIG. 23 are expressed in hexadecimal numbers. When the address is expressed by a hexadecimal 4-digit number, the letter “H” added at the end is omitted.

  In FIG. 23, the LED display counter value is stored in the RWM address F016. The LED display request counter is 1-byte data consisting of 8 bits, and designates which of the digits 1 to 5 is to be displayed. Of bits D0 to D7, bit D0 corresponds to digit 1, bit D1 corresponds to digit 2, bit D2 corresponds to digit 3, bit D3 corresponds to digit 4, and bit D4 corresponds to digit 5. To do. When a binary value is indicated in the following description, “B” is added to the end of the value. The initial value of the LED display request counter is 10H (00010000B), and each time a timer interrupt process described later is performed, 08H (00001000B) → 08H (00001000B) → 04H (00000100B) → 02H (00000010B) → 01H The value changes from (00000001B) to 00H (00000000B).

  When the value of the LED display request counter is 00000001B, it becomes 00000000B at the next interruption, but when it becomes 00H after the update, it is set again to the initial value 00010000B at the interruption. As a result, it is possible to avoid a state in which no digit is designated. Note that the initial value “00010000” may be set at the next interrupt when all the bits become “0”.

  In this way, the digit to be displayed is displayed by updating the value of the LED display request counter so that the digit “1” is shifted right by one (executes a shift instruction) for each timer interrupt processing. Designation changes cyclically in the order of digit 5 → digit 4 → digit 3 → digit 2 → digit 1 → digit 5 →. In addition, since a 7-segment display (digit) for displaying information is designated by the value of the LED display request counter, the processing for updating the LED display request counter and the value of the LED display request counter corresponds to the display designating means. It can be said that.

  Next, the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the address F017. The LED display request flag is a flag indicating a digit that can be turned on, and is stored as 1-byte data consisting of 8 bits (D0 to D7). For example, digits 1 and 2 (when the upper and lower digits of the credit number indicator 27 can be displayed, the D0 and D1 bits are “1”. If other digits cannot be displayed, the other bits are “ Therefore, the value of the LED display request flag in this case is 00000011B.

  In addition, the value of the LED display request flag is normal (during gaming and standby), digit 5 is off and digits 1 to 4 are on (00001111B), and digit 5 is on and digit 1 is being changed. ~ 4 is off (00010000B). Then, the LED display control means 170 performs an AND operation on the value of the LED display request flag and the value of the LED display request counter described above. As a result, the digit “1” is set as the lighting target at the time of the timer interruption process. To do.

  Next, display data of the acquired number display 28 is stored in the address F018. Specifically, display data of digits 3 (upper digit) and 4 (lower digit) is stored, and an offset value shown in FIG. 18A is stored as data specifying the display mode of each digit. Note that it may be determined as appropriate whether the display data is negative logic (active low) data or positive logic (active high) data. In this embodiment, when a low signal is output from the output terminals D0 to D7 of the output port 1, the corresponding segment is lit (see FIGS. 19 and 21).

  When displaying the payout number on the acquired number display 28, any one of 00H to 09H (F0H to F9H when the upper digit is turned off) is stored according to the number of medals to be paid out. When nothing is displayed (all segments are turned off), the value of FFH is stored. Further, when displaying the push order number, any value from E0H to EDH is stored according to the push order number to be displayed. Here, the data representing the push order number is an offset value corresponding to a display mode in which upper 4 bits of data are displayed in the upper digit, and an offset value corresponding to a display mode in which the lower 4 bits of data are displayed in the lower digit. It is good.

  Separately from this, the value of the quotient obtained by dividing by a predetermined constant (for example, 10H) is set as an offset value corresponding to the display mode to be displayed in the upper digit, and the remainder is displayed in the lower digit. It is good also as an offset value corresponding to a display mode. For example, when the push order number “= 8” is displayed, E8H is stored in the address F018. As a result, when E8H is divided by 10H, the quotient value becomes EH. Further, since the remainder value at this time is 8H, “8” is displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display 28. In the above example, the “predetermined constant” is 10H, but other values may be adopted.

  When an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means 160 described above, an error code corresponding to the detected abnormality is stored. Here, when the LED segment table A shown in FIG. 18A is used, as shown in FIG. 17, a power failure recovery error (display data: D1H), a set value error (display data: D2H), Error code of random number error (display data: D3H), medal insertion error (display data: C0H), medal retention error (display data: C1H), empty error (display data: CAH) or door open error (display data: CBH) Display data corresponding to is stored.

  When the LED segment table B (specifically, the second table) shown in FIG. 18B is used, in addition to the above-described errors, a payout error (display data: D0H), a medal jamming error (display data) : D9H) or display data corresponding to the error code of the medal full error (display data: 8EH) is also stored.

  Note that when displaying an error code (number) when an unrecoverable error has occurred in the slot machine 10, the LED display request flag and the LED display request counter are not referred to. On the other hand, when a recoverable error (error that can be recovered by operating the reset / setting switch 93 without turning off the power once) occurs, the value of the LED display request flag and the value of the LED display request counter As a result of AND operation, the digit “1” is a lighting target.

  In addition, when a recoverable error is detected during the game in which the push order number is displayed on the acquired number display 28 (when any reel is rotating), the push order number is displayed and all After the reel has stopped, an error code corresponding to the detected recoverable error may be displayed on the acquired number display 28. In addition, during a game, if a recoverable error occurs when the push order number is not displayed on the acquired number display 28, an error code corresponding to the recoverable error detected before all reels stop is displayed. You may make it display on the acquisition number display 28.

  Next, display data of the credit amount display unit 27 is stored at the address F019. Specifically, the offset value shown in FIG. 18A is stored as display data of digits 1 (upper digit) and 2 (lower digit). Whether the display data is negative logic (active low) data or positive logic (active high) data may be matched with the data stored in the address F018. The display data stored in the address F019 stores an offset value indicating the value of the stored number to be displayed in BCD (Binary Coded Decimal).

  That is, when the number of stored sheets is 0 to 9, the display data is 00H to 09H (F0H to F9H when the upper digits are turned off). When the storage number is 10 to 19, the display data is 10H to 19H. When the storage number is 20 to 29, the display data is 20H to 29H. When the stored number is 30 to 39, the display data is 30H to 39H. When the stored number is 40 to 49, the display data is 40H to 49H. When the number of stored sheets is 50, the display data is 50H.

  In the above example, when the number of stored sheets is 0, “0” is displayed in the lower digit of the credit number display 27. However, the upper digit and the lower digit may be turned off. In this case, the display data stored at the address F019 is FFH.

  Next, the address F01A stores the value of the push order number to be displayed as a binary value. Therefore, the numerical value range of data stored at this address is 00H to 0DH. The display data of the push order number stored in the address F018 described above is generated based on the push order number stored in this address.

  Next, in the address F01B, the on / off state of each display LED and the state of the slot machine 10 are stored in each of the bits D0 to D7. However, bits D1 and D5 are unused. First, the bit D0 stores whether the operation of the start switch 36 is permitted or prohibited. Here, “0” indicates prohibition (the game start display LED 25 is turned off), and “1” indicates permission (the game start display LED 25 is turned off). The bit D2 stores the on / off state of the blocker of the medal selector. If “0”, the medal can not be inserted (the insertable display LED 24 is off), and if “1”, the medal can be inserted (the insertable display LED 24 can be inserted). Is lit).

  Further, the ON / OFF state of the re-game display LED 23 is stored in the bit D3. If “0”, the re-game display LED 23 is turned off, and if “1”, the RE-game display LED 23 is turned on. Bit D4 stores the ON / OFF state of the clearing display LED 22. If "0", the clearing display LED 22 is OFF, and "1" indicates that it is ON. Bit D6 stores a value indicating whether or not the setting value can be changed. If the value is “0”, the value can be changed. If the value is “1”, the value cannot be changed. . Bit D7 indicates whether or not the number of medals inserted to play a game has reached the above-mentioned prescribed number (three during normal games (games other than bonus games)) (has reached the limit). A value is stored. If it is “0”, it indicates that the limit has not been reached, and if it is “1”, it indicates that the limit has been reached.

  The signal at the output terminal D7 of the output port 1 is generated based on the values of the bits D0, D2, D3, D4 of the data stored at the address.

  As described above, the LED display control means 170 performs display control of each of the 7-segment display units of the digits 1 to 5 and the display LEDs based on various data stored in the RWM. In addition, based on the data of the LED display request flag (address: F017) described above, it has been determined whether or not to display each digit. For example, normally, the display data related to the digit 5 is set to FFH and the setting is changed While the display data regarding the digits 1 to 4 is set to FFH, the LED display request flag is not referred to (that is, the LED display request flag is omitted), and the display of the digit specified by the value of the LED display counter is displayed. May be performed.

(Description of control command transmission means)
The control command transmission unit 180 transmits various information related to the game determined by each unit of the main control unit 100 to the sub-control unit 200. Information exchanged between the main control unit 100 and the sub control unit 200 is limited to one direction from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200. No information is sent directly. Information from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200 is transmitted in the form of a control command by serial communication. The control command is composed of a first control command (1 byte) indicating the type of information to be transmitted and a second control command (1 byte) indicating the content of the information to be transmitted. In addition, you may transmit a control command not only by serial communication but by parallel communication (for example, 16 harnesses).

  Here, FIGS. 24 and 25 show main ones of the control commands transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the sub-control unit 200. As shown in these figures, the first and second control commands are expressed in hexadecimal numbers (hexadecimal numbers). In addition, the names of the commands, the timing at which the commands are transmitted, and the commands are received. An outline of the processing that is sometimes performed by the sub-control means 200 is shown. The remarks column mainly shows the contents of information transmitted as the second control command. In addition, what is described as “##” as the value of the second control command is substituted with a numerical value determined according to the description content of the remarks column. However, if the numerical value determined according to the description in the remarks column is one digit, “0” is substituted for the upper digit. In addition, the letter “H” added to the end is omitted from the hexadecimal 4-digit numerical value representing each control command.

  First, in FIG. 24, a “setting change device operation start” command (8038) is executed when the front key of the slot machine 10 and the setting door provided in the slot machine 10 are opened, and the setting key is turned on. The message is transmitted when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on. Upon receiving this control command, the sub-control unit 200 starts the initialization process of the sub-control unit 200, and then indicates that the setting change operation has been performed, for example, the image display device 70 shown in FIG. To inform. When the power supply is turned on without satisfying the above-described setting change conditions, the current push order flag (to be described later) state and RT state when the power supply is shut off are also stored in a nonvolatile memory (also referred to as storage means). And the state of the stored push order flag and the RT state are restored. As a result, even when the power interruption occurs while the push order is notified by the acquired display number LED, the push order can be notified by the acquired display number LED when the power is restored, and the game is played from the middle of the push order game. Can be executed. Note that the RWM included in the main control unit 100 and the sub control unit 200 may be a non-volatile memory so as to have the above-described role of the non-volatile memory (so-called data backup).

  Here, the transmission processing of the “setting change device operation start” command (8038) will be described in detail. In the game progress main process, when the setting change condition is satisfied, an interrupt is started after initializing the RWM in a predetermined range of the main control means 100, and transmission for transmitting a “setting change device operation start” command Process. Thereafter, the game progress main process (FIG. 27) executes a standby process. In the present embodiment, the interrupt count “224” is stored in the storage means such as the RWM or a register as the waiting process time. Each time the interrupt process is executed, the interrupt count is updated, and the standby process is executed until the interrupt count reaches “224”.

  In this process, the initialization of the RWM of the main control unit 100 is performed by, for example, initializing 512 bytes of the addresses “F000 (H)” to “F111 (H)”, whereas the sub-control unit 200 clears the RWM. The range is caused by, for example, approximately 12 to 13 gigabytes of addresses “000000 (H)” to “800000 (H)”. Specifically, when the sub-control unit 200 is still in the initialization process, the main control 100 side further completes the initialization after the initialization has already been completed, the setting change is completed, and the game proceeds. This is to prevent the progress of the control process of the main control means 100 and the progress of the control process of the sub-control means 200 from becoming out of synchronization. That is, before the standby process described above is completed in the main control unit 100, a “setting change device operation start” command is transmitted to the sub control unit 200, and the initialization is completed based on the reception of the command. be able to.

  The “setting change device operation end” command (8001 to 8006) is a control command for transmitting the setting value (any one of 1 to 6) set by the game hall staff to the sub-control means 200. The value of the set value in which the numerical value of the 2-digit second control command portion is set is shown. In this control command, the setting value is selected by the above-mentioned staff or the like by operating the reset / setting switch 93, and the setting change key switch 92 is turned on after the start switch 36 is operated (operation for determining the setting value). Sent when turned off (also called the fall of the set key signal). Receiving this command, the sub-control means 200 informs that it is in a game standby state.

  When the set value is changed, the state of the push order flag may be cleared to OFF, while the RT state may be maintained as it is. In many cases, the setting value is changed outside the game hall business hours, and the transition condition from non-RT to RT1 is not easy as in this embodiment (that is, winning -P to R wins). The probability is not a high probability, and in order to display the specific symbols 01 to 03, not only the pressing order but also the so-called eye-pushing is necessary.) If the RT state is initialized to non-RT at the time of setting change, This is because it may not be possible to shift to RT1 without passing through a considerable number of non-RT games that are not advantageous to the player during business hours. On the other hand, if the state of the push order flag is cleared to OFF, the push order is not notified, and therefore it is possible to easily shift to RT1 even if the RT state before the setting change (for example, RT2 to RT4) is maintained. it can. That is, since the winning probability of re-games I to T is high, and re-game 02 or re-game 04 is displayed only in the pressing order regardless of the operation timing, the process easily shifts to RT1.

  Also, in the RT state different from the present embodiment, for example, in the non-RT and non-RT, BB01 is determined to be a winning combination, and if the symbol combination corresponding to BB01 is not prepared, the first RT state (inside the bonus) ), In the case of having only the second RT state that shifts when the symbol combinations corresponding to BB01 are aligned in the non-RT and first RT states, and basically the game in the inside of the bonus (first RT state) However, in the case of a slot machine in which the combined winning probability of the re-gamer rises significantly when it is inside the bonus, if the RT state is initialized to non-RT at the time of setting change, it becomes difficult for the re-gamer to win This makes it easier to win a bonus combination. For this reason, at the time of setting change, it is desirable to maintain the RT state before the setting change without initializing to non-RT. When the set value is not changed, the reset / setting switch 93 is not operated, and transmission can be performed at the falling edge of the setting key signal after the start switch 36 is operated.

  If any abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection unit 160 shown in FIG. 3, the control command transmission unit 180 determines that the value of the first control command is 81H and the type of abnormality in which the value of the second control command is detected. Send various error display start commands accordingly. That is, when a power failure recovery error is detected, a “power failure recovery error display start” command (8101) is detected, and when a setting value error is detected, a “setting value error display start” command (8102) is determined. Is detected, a “random number error display start” command (8103) is transmitted, and when a medal insertion error is detected, a “medal insertion error display start” command (8104) is transmitted.

  If a medal retention error is detected, a “medal retention error display start” command (8105) is detected. If an empty error is detected, an “empty error display start” command (8106) is detected, and a door opening error is detected. If a payout error is detected, a “door open error display start” command (8107) is sent. If a payout error is detected, a “payout error display start” command (8108) is sent.

  Further, when a medal jam error is detected, a “medal jam error display start” command (8109) is transmitted, and when a medal full error is detected, a “medal full error display start” command (810A) is transmitted. Of the various errors shown in FIG. 17, when a recoverable error is detected by the abnormality detection means 160, when the reset / setting switch 93 is operated, an “error return” command (8100) is sent to the sub-control. Transmit to means 200.

  The “set value designation” command (8201 to 8206), the “operation state” command (8401/8402/8404/8406), and the “RT state” command (8500/8501) are control commands transmitted every time a game is performed. It is. The second control command of the “set value designation” command is the value of the “set value” that has been set, and the second control command of the “operation state” command is whether the game to be played is a re-game or a bonus game It is information indicating whether or not there is. The second control command of the “RT state” command is information indicating whether the current RT state is non-RT or RT1-6.

  The “clearing start” command (8F02) is transmitted when the clearing switch 33 is operated, and the “clearing end” command (8F03) is transmitted when all credited medals are paid out. Thereby, the sub-control unit 200 generates a medal payout start sound or a payout end sound according to the received control command. The “storage input number (1)” to “storage input number (3)” commands (9001 to 9003) and the “medal insertion (1)” command (9071) are the numbers when the medals are bet. Is a control command transmitted in response to. Here, the “stored input number (1 sheet)” to “stored input number (3 sheets)” command is triggered by the operation of the bet switch 34 or 35, and the “medal input (1 sheet)” command is It is transmitted when a medal is inserted into the insertion slot 32. As a result, the sub-control means 200 generates medal insertion sounds for the number of sheets indicated by the received control command.

  Next, in FIG. 25, a “reel rotation start acceptance” command (9300 to 9303), a “freeze number” command (9400 to 9402), a “push order number” command (9500 to 950D), a “main mode number” command (9601) To 9404), "AT flag" command (9700/9701), "push order flag" command (B000 / B001), "number of added games" command (B1 ##), "effect group number" command (B200 to B227) And the “actual item winning number” command (B300 / B301) is transmitted when the start switch 36 is operated by the player.

  In the “reel rotation start acceptance” command, the number of medals inserted in the game by the second control command (the bet number set by the player) is transmitted to the sub-control means 200. For example, when the total number of medals acquired by the player during an AT game, which will be described later, is displayed, the sub-control means 200 performs processing such as subtracting the number of medals inserted into the game from the total number. . The “freeze number” command transmits to the sub-control means 200 whether or not the freeze effect is to be performed by the second control command, and if the freeze effect is to be performed, which of the freeze effects A and B is to be executed. Specifically, when the freeze effect is not performed, the value of the second control command is “0”. When the freeze effect A is executed, the value of the second control command is “1” and the freeze effect B is executed. The value of the second control command is “2”.

  Here, the freeze effects A and B differ in the movement (rotation mode) of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R in the freeze state. Further, when a freeze effect is performed, the sub-control unit 200 controls the image display device 70 and the speakers 64L and 64R to execute the effect according to the type of the freeze effect.

  The “push order number” command transmits the push order number shown in FIG. Thereby, the sub-control means 200 notifies the player of the push order corresponding to the received push order number by the image or sound displayed on the image display device 70 when the push order flag described later is on. However, if the sub-control unit 200 receives the push order number 0 (unknown), the sub-control unit 200 does not notify the push order except when the sub-control unit 200 determines the push order (described later). In this way, the information regarding the pressing order is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 independently of the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means 110 by the “push order number” command. A different pressing order can be notified by the sub-control means 200 as required.

  The “main mode number” command transmits the current main mode (see FIG. 14) to the sub-control means 200 by the second control command. Thereby, the sub-control means 200 controls the effect according to each main mode.

  The “AT flag” command transmits to the sub-control means 200 whether the AT flag is on or off by the second control command. It can be said that the AT flag is information for allowing the sub-control means 200 to recognize whether the main gaming state is the notification gaming state (AT) or the non-notification gaming state (non-AT). Thus, if the AT flag is on, the sub-control means 200 performs an effect during the AT game, updates the number of remaining games in the AT game, and the like. The “AT flag” here is a flag indicating whether or not the AT game is in progress in the main control means 100. When the AT flag is updated to ON, the AT game is started, and the AT flag is ON. In some cases, the number of AT games remaining is basically updated.

  The “push order flag” command transmits to the sub-control means 200 whether the push order flag is on or off by the second control command. Thereby, if the push order flag is on, the sub-control means 200 notifies the push order corresponding to the push order number received by the “push order number” command. The “push order flag” here is a flag indicating whether or not to notify the push order in the main control means 100. When the push order flag is on, the main control means 100 basically The determined push order number is displayed on the acquired number display 28. Basically, the push order flag is turned on when the main mode 4 is entered, and the push order flag is turned off when the main mode 4 ends. However, the push order flag may be turned on even when staying in a main mode other than the main mode 4, and in this case, the push order flag is turned off when the game ends.

  Here, since the “AT flag” and the “push order flag” have almost the same role, it is possible to control only with the “AT flag” without providing the “push order flag”. Therefore, there is no problem even if the “push order flag” is read as “AT flag”. Specifically, a game with the “push order flag” turned on is an AT game, and a game with the “push order flag” turned off is a non-AT game.

  The “number of added games” command transmits the added number of AT games to the sub-control means 200 by the second control command. Thus, when the sub-control means 200 receives a numerical value of 1 or more when the AT flag is on (that is, during an AT game), the sub-control means 200 adds the received value to the remaining number of games in the current AT game. . Then, the sub-control unit 200 displays, on the image display device 70, the difference between the number of remaining games of the AT game after the addition and the number of remaining games of the AT game before the addition in the process based on the “item winning number” command. Perform an extra effect. In addition, when the sub-control unit 200 receives a numerical value of 1 or more, the sub-control unit 200 stores the received numerical value, and after performing an extra effect according to the received numerical value in the processing based on the “object winning number” command, The received value may be added to the number of remaining games of the current AT game.

  In the “production group number” command, when the winning combination determining means 110 shown in FIG. 3 determines whether the winning combination is a re-game or winning combination, the value of the winning number corresponding to the determined winning combination is It is transmitted as the second control command. When mask processing described later is performed, the value of the mask number after mask processing is transmitted as the second control command. In addition, when a bonus combination is determined as a winning combination by the winning combination determining means 110, the value of the second control command is changed from “0” to “1”. And is transmitted to each game and sub-control means 200. When the bonus combination is won and the bonus game is started, the value of the second control command is changed from “1” to “0”.

  If any winning combination is not determined when the RT state is non-RT or RT1 to RT4, the value of the second control command of the “production group number” command and the “actual winning number” command Are both “0”. When the bonus combination is won, the RT state becomes RT5, and the value of the second control command of the “item winning number” command becomes “1”. Until the bonus combination is won, the value of the second control command of the “actual winning number” command remains “1”, and the value of the second control command of the “production group number” command is The value determined based on the winning combination determined in. As a result, the sub-control means 200 performs an effect corresponding to the determined winning combination based on at least the second control command of the “push order number” command, the “effect group number” command, and the “actual winning number” command. It can be carried out. In addition, the “winning item winning number” command also serves to transmit to the sub-control means 200 that the start switch 36 has been operated. The sub-control means 200 performs a process when the start switch is operated (for example, a process for starting notification of the pressing order corresponding to the received pressing order number) based on the “object winning number” command.

  The transmission order of the “push order number” command, the “main mode number” command, the “AT flag” command, the “push order flag” command, and the “number of added games” command may be appropriately determined. Is preferably transmitted to the sub-control means 200 prior to the “production group number” command and the “community winning number” command. The “push order number” command is preferably transmitted after the push order number is displayed on the acquired number display 28, and the “effect group number” command and the “actual winning number” command rotate the reel at a constant speed. In order to start the notification of the pressing order corresponding to the pressing order number before the reel reaches the constant speed rotation, the sub-control unit 200 is in a state where the operation of the stop switch can be accepted. It is desirable that the information is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 before the reel reaches the constant speed rotation. In this embodiment, the rotation of the reel is started so that the “effect group number” command and the “object winning number” command are reliably transmitted to the sub-control means 200 before the reel reaches the constant speed rotation. The information is transmitted to the sub-control unit 200 before. Note that the “push order number” command, the “production group number” command, and the “actual object winning number” command may be continuously transmitted when the start lever is operated.

  Further, the push order number and the ON / OFF state of at least one of the AT flag and the push order flag may be collectively transmitted as one second control command. For example, when the push order unknown and the push order numbers corresponding to the six push orders and the AT flag are combined into one second control command, the push order unknown when the AT flag is off is set to the push order number 0. The left-to-middle-to-right push order when the AT flag is off is set to push order number 1, and the push order is unknown when the AT flag is off and the six push orders are pushed to push numbers 0-6 Then, the AT flag can be combined into one second control command by determining the push order unknown when the AT flag is on and the six push orders as push order numbers 7-13.

  In the same way, when the push order numbers corresponding to the six push orders and the push order flag are combined into one second control command, the push order when the push order flag is off is always unknown. The push order number is set to 0, the left push order when the push order flag is on, the left push order is set to the middle push order, and the push order flag is set to 1 so that the six push orders when the push order flag is on are set. By determining the push order numbers 1 to 6, the push order flags can be combined into one second control command.

  Also, for example, the most significant bit of the second control command in the “push order number” command is used as a bit representing the ON / OFF state of the AT flag or push order flag, and the lower 7 bits are used as bits representing the push order number. May be. Furthermore, the most significant bit may be used as an AT flag, the bit one lower thereof as a bit representing the on / off state of the push order flag, and the lower 6 bits may be used as a bit representing the push order number. In this case, it may be determined as appropriate which of the AT flag and the push order flag is the most significant bit.

  The “left reel rotation stop” command (987E), the “middle reel rotation stop” command (997E), and the “right reel rotation stop” command (9A87E) are respectively used for the sub-control means 200 when the corresponding reel stop control is performed. Sent to. As a result, the sub-control means 200 produces an effect that enhances the expectation of winning a prize, for example, by turning off the back lamp provided on the rear surface of the reel or generating a so-called tempering sound.

  The “reel rotation start standby” command (9B00) is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 when 4.1 seconds (minimum game time) have elapsed since the reel rotation started in the previous game. Thereby, the sub-control means 200 stops the production sound (wait sound) generated during the wait period.

  The “Left reel stop acceptance” command (9E00 to 9E77) is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 when the left stop switch 37L is operated, and the symbol number (stop) is stopped at the middle stage M as the second control command. A value obtained by adding the number of sliding frames (0 to 5) to the value obtained by multiplying the symbol number: 0 to 19 (0H to 13H in hexadecimal notation) by “6” is transmitted. Thereby, in the sub-control means 200, the value obtained by dividing the value of the received second control command by “6” becomes the stop symbol number, and the remainder becomes the number of sliding symbols. The value obtained by subtracting the number of sliding symbols from the stop symbol number is the symbol number that passes through the middle stage M when the stop switch is operated (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation acceptance symbol number”).

  For example, when the stop operation reception number of the left reel is “18” and the stop symbol number is “1”, the number of sliding symbols is 1 (stop symbol number) −18 (stop operation reception symbol number) +20 ( Correction value: number of symbols per reel) = 3 (frame). As a result, the value of the second control command is 1 × 6 + 3 = 9. In this case, the “left reel stop acceptance” command is 9E09. Further, the sub-control unit 200 outputs the output effect switching or stop operation acceptance sound that has been output when the command is received. A “left reel rotation start” command (9E7F) is transmitted when the left reel 40L starts to rotate, whereby the sub-control means 200 can generate an effect sound when the reel rotation starts.

  As with the left reel 40L, the middle reel 40C and the right reel 40R have a “middle reel stop acceptance” command (9F00 to 9F77), a “middle reel rotation start” command (9F7F), and a “right reel stop acceptance” command. (A000 to A077) and a “right reel rotation start” command (A07F) are transmitted to the sub-control means 200.

  The “display type” command (A400 to A402) and the “design combination display” command (A500 / A501) are transmitted to the sub-control means 200 when the rotation of all reels is stopped. The “display type” command transmits to the sub-control means 200 the type of symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the winning line according to the value of the second control command. Specifically, when the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the winning line L is one of the special symbols 01 to 03, it becomes 01H, and otherwise it becomes 00H.

  The “display symbol combination” command transmits to the sub-control means 200 whether or not the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the winning line according to the value of the second control command corresponds to the bonus combination or replay combination. Specifically, when the symbol combination stopped on the winning line L corresponds to BB01, it is 01H, when it corresponds to any symbol combination of replays 01 to 10, it is 02H. When the symbol combination is displayed, 00H is set. As a result, the sub-control means 200 can determine that all reels have stopped, and can perform an effect lottery process for the next game.

  The “game medal payout start” command (A600 to A609) is used to set the number of medals to be paid out when any one of the symbol combinations corresponding to the small combination is stopped on the winning line L and the value of the second control command (00H to 09H) to the sub-control means 200. The “game medal payout end” command (A67F) is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 when any of the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the winning line L and the payout of medals is completed. The “game end display” command (A900) is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 when one game ends, and the “BB end” command (A900) is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 when the bonus game ends. The

  As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, in this embodiment, when the re-game player and the winning combination are won, the symbol combinations that are subject to the pull-in control differ according to the pressing order of the stop switch, Each winning combination has a different push order (hereinafter, also referred to as “advantageous push order”) resulting in an advantageous game result. Here, the “advantageous game result” refers to, for example, a symbol combination in which a combination of symbols that shift to the RT state where the combined winning probability of the re-gamer is higher is prepared, or that more medals are paid out. It means to be aligned. For this reason, if the “winning / replay winning number” itself won based on the result of the role lottery is sent as a command to the sub-control means 200, if the command is acquired, an advantageous push from the second control command The order can be determined, and a game result advantageous to the illegality can be obtained. Such a concern arises particularly when the “winning / replay winning number” is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 during the non-AT, and the “winning / replay winning number” is set to “production” during the AT. This does not exclude transmission to the sub-control means 200 as a “group number”.

  Therefore, the control command transmission means 180 is determined as the second control command of the “production group number” command when at least the push order flag is off and the player is not notified of the push order. Replace the winning / replay winning number with another number and replace the number (hereinafter referred to as “mask number” or “winning / replay winning number after mask processing”) with the “Direction Group Number” command. To the sub-control means 200 as a second control command. Note that the masking process is a process that makes it difficult to specify the type of the winning / replaying winning number determined by removing the information regarding the push order from the determined winning / replaying winning number. In the embodiment, the process of replacing the determined winning / replay winning number with an effect group number (also referred to as a mask number or a group number) is referred to as “mask process”. In this embodiment, even when the push order flag is on, mask processing may be performed at all times (regardless of whether the push order flag is on or off), or when a push order hitting game is performed. The mask processing may be performed so that an illegally advantageous game result is not obtained.

  Here, the correspondence between the winning number and the mask number (effect group number) will be described with reference to FIG. First, when re-game-A or B is determined to be a winning combination in the lottery, the control command transmission unit 180 replaces the information transmitted to the sub-control unit 200 with the mask number 40 (common re-game-A). That is, the value of the second control command of the “production group number” command is set to 40. When any of the re-games-C to T is determined as the winning combination, the control command transmission unit 180 replaces the information transmitted to the sub-control unit 200 with the mask number 41 (common re-game-B).

  Next, when any one of the winning prizes -A to J (a winning combination with the possibility of winning 9 winning combinations) is won, the control command transmitting unit 160 transmits the information to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 200 with the mask number 42 ( Replace with common-bell). In addition, when either of the winning prizes -K or L (a winning combination in which two winning combinations may win) is won, the control command transmitting unit 180 transmits the information to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 200 to the mask number 43 (common). -Replace with watermelon). Here, the winning combination -K or L does not change the symbol combination that is the target of the pull-in control according to the pressing order. Further, since the number of payouts when winning a prize is less than the prescribed number (3), the above-described masking process may be omitted.

  In addition, when either of the winning-M or N (a winning combination in which five winning combinations are likely to win) is won, the control command transmitting unit 180 sets the information transmitted to the sub-control unit 200 to the mask number 44 (common). -Replace with cherry). Further, when any of the winnings -P to R (a winning combination with the possibility of winning eight winning combinations) is won, the control command transmitting unit 180 sets the information transmitted to the sub-control unit 200 to the mask number 45 (common- Replace with 8).

  In this way, since a common mask number (production group number) is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 for a plurality of winning numbers, even if a mask number (production group number) is acquired by fraud, It becomes impossible to specify an advantageous pressing order. Further, when the sub-control means 200 receives the mask number 40, the sub-control means 200 performs an effect (strong effect) that increases the expectation of the player. On the other hand, when the mask number 41 is received, an effect (weak effect) with a lower expectation than the strong effect described above is performed for the player. Similarly, the sub-control unit 200 also performs an effect corresponding to each mask number when the mask numbers 42 to 45 are received.

  In the present embodiment, when winning-O or winning-S is won, the mask process is not performed even if the push order flag is off. For example, the winning combination -O does not change the symbol combination that is the target of the pull-in control according to the pressing order. Also, since the number of payouts when winning is less than the prescribed number (3), even if the “production group number” command transmitted to the sub-control means 200 is acquired by some fraudulent action, there is little damage. is there. However, as described above, it may be similarly converted into a mask number, and the converted information may be defined as an “effect group number” command.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, in addition to the method of replacing the winning number with the mask number, for example, as shown in FIG. Grouping is performed based on the number of sheets, a unique number (group number) is assigned to each group, and the group number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 instead of the winning number as a mask process. Good. In this case as well, this masking process may be omitted when the winning number 31, 32 or 35 is determined as the winning combination.

  By the way, when the mask process as shown in FIG. 26B is performed, since the group number having the same value as the winning number exists, for example, the second of the “effect group number” command received by the sub-control means 200 is received. 2 When the value of the control command is any one of 1 to 7, the winning number itself is transmitted as the “production group number” command during the AT, and the mask process is performed as the “production group number” command during the non-AT. In the specification of transmitting a group number, it is not possible to distinguish between the two. Therefore, among the 1-byte (8-bit) data representing the second control command of the “production group number” command, information indicating the winning number and information indicating the group number are included in a specific bit (for example, the most significant bit). Information for distinguishing may be included. For example, when the value of the most significant bit of the second control command is “0”, the value of the lower 7 bits represents the winning number, and when the value of the most significant bit is “1”, the lower 7 bits The value is determined such that it represents a group number.

  Further, as a method for distinguishing between the winning number and the group number, the value of the first control command may be different between the winning number and the group number. For example, in the case of performing the mask processing shown in FIG. 26B, the first control command for transmitting the winning number is B2 (hexadecimal), and the first control command for transmitting the group number is B4 (16 (Procedure). For example, when the winning number 2 is transmitted as it is, the control command B202 (the value of the lower 1 byte represents the winning number) is transmitted to the sub-control means 200, and the group number is transmitted by performing mask processing. Transmits a control command B401 (the value of the lower 1 byte represents a group number) to the sub-control means 200.

(Description of external signal transmission means)
Returning to FIG. 3, the external signal transmission means 190 is described above via the external concentration terminal board 84 by a timer interruption process (described later) executed in the main control means 100 at a predetermined cycle (2.235 milliseconds). The IN signal, OUT signal, BB signal, abnormality occurrence signal, start signal and AT signal are output to the outside. In the present embodiment, when the state of the AT flag is updated from off to on, the AT signal is output, and when the state of the AT flag is updated from on to off, the AT signal is output. ing. This is because when the state of the AT flag is on, even if BB01 is determined to be a winning combination, the state of the AT flag is not updated to off.

  Even if the state of the AT flag is updated from off to on, the AT signal may not be output until the RT state shifts to RT4. Also, when the specification is such that when the status of the AT flag is updated to OFF when the BB01 is determined to be the winning combination when the AT flag is ON, the BB01 is determined to be the winning combination and the AT flag The output of the AT signal on may be maintained even if the state of is updated to OFF. This is because in the case of such a specification, when the bonus game ends, the state of the AT flag is updated to ON again. Of course, when the state of the AT flag is updated to OFF, the AT signal OFF may be output.

≪Description of sub-control means≫
<Sub-control means and peripheral hardware configuration>
The sub-control unit 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, an RWM, and the like, and is transmitted from the sub-control board 202 that controls an effect to be executed based on the control command transmitted from the main control unit 100 and the sub-control board 202. On the basis of the sub-control command, the image display device 70, the speakers 64L and 64R, and the image control board 204 that drives effect means such as the effect lamp 72 are configured.

<Functional block of sub control board>
The sub-control board 202 determines the content of the effect or notification based on the control command transmitted from the main control unit 100, and generates the sub-control command for executing the determined effect or notification, A control command receiving unit 220 that receives a control command transmitted from the main control unit 100 and a sub control command transmission / reception unit 230 that transmits a sub control command generated by the effect control unit 210 to the image control board 204. Has been.

(Description of production control means)
The effect control means 210 is a means for controlling an effect to be executed according to the gaming state, and includes an effect lottery means 212 and an effect state control means 214. In the gaming state described above, the winning combination type (direction group type) determined by the winning combination determining means 110, the RT state, the main mode and the freeze number state, and the ON / OFF state of the AT flag and the push order flag are displayed. and so on.

  The effect control means 210 includes an effect lottery means 212 for determining an effect according to the control command received from the main control means 100 and the current effect state (described later), and the control transmitted from the main control means 100. Production state control means 214 that performs production state transition control based on the command is provided. Here, the effect states controlled by the effect state control means 214 are roughly classified into a non-AT state and an AT state. The non-AT state further includes a normal state, a chance zone (hereinafter also referred to as “CZ”) state, and an AT precursor state. The AT state includes AT preparation, AT preparation, special zone preparation, and special zone.

(Description of control command receiving means)
The control command receiving unit 220 receives the control command transmitted from the main control unit 100 through serial communication, converts the received control command into parallel data, and stores the command buffer (for example, RWM) included in the sub-control unit 200 in the order received. In a part of the storage area). As a result, the effect control unit 210 sequentially performs processing based on the control command stored first among the control commands stored in the command buffer.

(Description of sub-control command transmission / reception means)
The sub-control command transmission / reception unit 230 transmits the sub-control command generated by the effect control unit 210 to the image control board 204 by serial communication every predetermined period (for example, 1 millisecond). Further, the sub control command transmission / reception means 230 receives a command transmitted from a sub control command transmission / reception means 240 described later.

<Functional block of image control board>
The image control board 204 includes a sub control command transmission / reception means 240 and an image / sound output means 240. Based on the sub control command transmitted from the sub control board 202, the image display device 70, speakers 64L and 64R, and effects The lamp 72 is driven and controlled, and the effect determined by the effect control means 210 is executed.

(Description of sub-control command transmission / reception means)
The sub control command transmission / reception means 240 receives the sub control command transmitted by serial communication from the sub control command transmission / reception means 230, converts the received sub control command into parallel data, and stores them in the sub command buffer in the order received. I will do it. Further, the sub control command transmission / reception means 240 is a command indicating whether or not the image control board 240 is operating normally, and a command indicating whether or not the command transmitted from the sub control command transmission / reception means 230 has been normally received. Is transmitted to the sub-control command transmission / reception means 230. As a result, the sub control board 202 can detect an abnormality occurring in the image control board 204, and when the image control board 204 fails to receive the sub control command, the sub control command can be retransmitted. .

(Description of image / sound output means)
The image / sound output means 250 outputs the effect image signal and sound signal generated by the image control board 204 to the image display device 70 and the speakers 64L and 64R. Thereby, the effect image is displayed on the image display device 70, and sound is generated from the speakers 64L and 64R. On the other hand, from the image display device 70 and the speakers 64L and 64R, a normal operation signal indicating whether or not normal operation is possible is output to the image control board 204 (or the sub control board 202). If the normal operation signal cannot be received, the image / audio signal may be held without being sent, or may be discarded as the game progresses.

[Description of processing by control means]
<< Description of control processing in main control means >>
First, the contents of the game progress main process that is executed in the main control means 100 and controls the progress of the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The game progress main process shown in FIG. 27 is executed after various check processes (including a set value change process) executed after power-on of the slot machine 10 are performed. The game can be controlled by repeatedly executing the game.

<Description of the game progress main process>
When the game progress main process is started, the main control means 100 performs a game start process (step S10). In this game start process, information indicating a set value (“set value designation” command) and information indicating whether the next game to be played is a re-game or a bonus game (“operating state”). "Command), information indicating the RT state (" RT state "command) is transmitted. Further, the blocker 45 (see FIG. 3) in the medal selector is turned on to form a medal flow path, and the medal insertion from the medal insertion slot 32 is made effective. However, when the next game to be played is a re-game, automatic medal insertion processing (for example, automatically turning on the bet number display lamps 26a, 26b, and 26c) is performed, and the credit number has reached the upper limit. In this case, the blocker 45 is turned off and the medal inserted from the medal slot 32 is received from the tray 62. Also, the push order number stored in the RWM address F01A is updated to “0”.

  Next, the main control means 100 performs a process (game medal management process) associated with the insertion of medals (step S12). As this process, for example, a display update process on the credit number display 27, a credit number subtraction process, a fraud determination process regarding medal insertion from the medal insertion slot 32, a bet number counting process, and the like are executed. Next, when the number of inserted medals reaches the specified number and the operation of the start switch 36 is accepted, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the start switch 36 has been operated (step S14). When it is determined that there is no (NO), the process returns to step S12.

  If it is determined in step S14 that the start switch 36 has been operated (YES), the blocker 45 is turned off, the insertion of medals from the medal insertion slot 32 is disabled, and the “reel rotation start acceptance” is performed. "Command is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (step S16). Next, the main control means 100 performs a role lottery process based on the lottery table shown in FIG. 4, and based on the result, saves the winning / replay winning number and the winning feature winning number in a predetermined storage area of the RWM. (Step S18). Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the current RT state is either RT5 or RT6 (step S20). If the current RT state is non-RT or RT1 to RT4, the determination result in step S20 is NO, and the main control unit 100 determines whether the current main mode is any one of 1 to 3. Is determined (step S22). If the main mode is any one of 1 to 3, the determination result is YES and non-AT state processing is performed (step S24). If the main mode is 4, the determination result is NO and AT. State processing is performed (step S26). Here, in the non-AT state process in step S24 and the AT state process in step S26, a push order number corresponding to the winning number is determined and stored in the RWM address F01A of the main control means 100. This will be described in detail later with reference to a detailed flowchart.

  When either the non-AT state process or the AT state process is performed, the main control unit 100 determines whether or not to perform the freeze effect. When it is determined to perform the freeze effect, either the freeze effect A or B is determined. A freeze lottery process for determining whether or not to perform is performed (step S28). The contents of the freeze lottery process will be described in detail later with reference to a detailed flowchart. Then, it is determined whether or not the freeze number is determined to be 1 or 2 by the freeze lottery process in step S28 (step S30), and the freeze number is determined to be 1 or 2 (that is, it is determined to execute the freeze effect). If YES, the determination result is YES, and 20 seconds is set in the timer as the time for counting (step S32). This time measurement is for measuring the time for performing the freeze effect (longest freeze time).

  Next, the main control means 100 starts a freeze effect corresponding to the freeze number determined by the freeze lottery process (step S34). That is, freeze effect A is started when freeze number 1 is determined, and freeze effect B is started when freeze number 2 is determined. During the freeze effect, rotation control of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R is performed in accordance with each freeze effect by a timer interruption process described later. Then, it is determined whether or not the longest freeze time set in the timer has elapsed (step S36), and the determination process of step S36 is repeatedly executed until the longest freeze time has elapsed.

  When the longest freeze time has elapsed, the determination result in step S36 is YES, and then the main control means 100 executes a push order display process for displaying information corresponding to the push order number on the acquired number display 28 (see FIG. Step S38). If the freeze number 0 is determined in the freeze lottery process in step S28 described above, the determination result in step S30 is NO, and the process immediately proceeds to the push order display process in step S38. This push order display process will be described in detail later with reference to a detailed flowchart.

  Next, the main control means 100 reads the ON / OFF state of the push order flag from a predetermined storage area of the RWM and stores it in the ring buffer (step S40). If the determination result in step S20 is YES (that is, if the current RT state is RT5 or RT6), the process immediately proceeds to step S40. This ring buffer temporarily stores a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control means 200, and uses a part of the storage area of the RWM described above as a ring buffer. The control commands stored in the ring buffer are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 200 from the first stored in the timer interrupt process described later, and the transmitted control commands are deleted from the ring buffer. That is, a control command stored later is not transmitted to the sub-control means 200 before a control command stored before that time.

  A priority is set for each control command. If a control command saved later has a higher priority than a control command saved earlier, the control command saved later is sub-control first. You may make it transmit to the means 200. FIG. For example, unlike the present embodiment, the push order number command to be described below is set to have a higher priority than the effect group number command and the feature winning number command. Even when the number command is stored in the ring buffer and then the push order number command is saved in the ring buffer, the push order number command may be transmitted to the sub-control means 200 first.

  Then, the main control unit 100 reads the push order number data from the RWM address F01A, generates a push order number command (950 #), and stores it in the ring buffer (step S42). As a result, the push order number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 following the on / off state of the push order flag by the timer interrupt process described above. Next, the main control means 100 reads the winning / replay winning number stored in the RWM by the role lottery process in step S18 and sets it in the CPU register (hereinafter simply referred to as “register”) (step S44). It is determined whether or not the state of the push order flag stored in the RWM is on (step S46). If the push order flag is on, the determination result in step S46 is YES, and it is then determined whether or not the push order number stored in the RWM is any of 10-13 (step S48). If the push order number is any one of 10 to 13, the determination result in step S48 is YES, and the main control means 100 next determines whether or not the winning number 35 (winning-O) is determined as the winning combination. Judgment is made (step S50). In the determination process of step S46, if the push order flag is off, the determination result is NO, and the process proceeds to the determination process of step S50 without performing the determination process of step S48.

  In the determination process of step S50, if the winning number determined as the winning combination is other than 35, the determination result is NO and the mask process shown in FIG. 26A is performed (step S52). Here, as a method of replacing the winning number with the mask number, a predetermined offset value is added to the winning number set in the register in the process of step S44 to obtain the corresponding mask number value. That is, the above-described offset value is a value determined in advance so that each winning number is the mask number shown in FIG. For example, the offset value corresponding to the winning number 1 is set to 39, and the offset value corresponding to the winning number 2 is set to 38. As a result, when the mask process of step S52 is performed for the winning number 1 and the winning number 2, the winning number and the offset value are added, and the mask number is 40 in both cases. This offset value may be written in advance on the program being added, or may be previously determined as a table and the offset value read from the table may be added.

  In the determination process in step S48, when the push order number is other than 10-13 (the determination result is NO) or in the determination process in step S50, the winning number is 35 (the determination result is YES), The mask process in step S52 is not performed.

  Next, the main control means 100 stores the effect group number set in the CPU register in the ring buffer (step S54). That is, if the push order number is other than 10-13 when the push order flag is on (steps S46 (YES) and S48 (NO)), any of the push order numbers 10-13 when the push order flag is on. However, if the winning number is 35 (step S46 (YES) and S48 (YES) and S50 (YES)), or if the push order flag is off but the winning number is 35 (step S46) (NO) and S50 (YES)), the winning / replay winning number set in the register in the process of step S44 is stored in the ring buffer.

  In this way, immediately after the mask process in step S52, the mask number obtained by the mask process is stored in the ring buffer (step S54), so there is no need to secure a storage area for storing the mask number in the RWM. .

  On the other hand, when the push order flag is on and the push order number is any of 10 to 13 and the winning number is other than 35 (steps S46 (YES) and S48 (YES) and S50 (NO)), or When the push order flag is on and the winning number is other than 35 (steps S46 (NO) and S50 (NO)), the mask number obtained in step S52 is stored in the ring buffer. Next, the main control means 100 reads the winning combination winning number stored in the RWM and stores it in the ring buffer (step S56).

  In addition, the process from step S44 to S54 performed the mask process uniformly even if any winning / replay winning number was determined by performing the process described below. Information can be transmitted to the sub-control means 200 as an effect group number.

  First, the winning / replay winning number stored in the RWM is stored in the first register (for example, the A register), and the start address of the effect group number specifying table in which the effect group number is stored is stored in the second register (for example, the A register). HL register). This production group number designation table is a table that defines which production group number is designated corresponding to the winning / replay winning number, and when the value of the head address is X (H), the address X (H ) Is defined as the production group number “0” corresponding to the winning / replay winning number 0, and the address X + 1 (H) is defined as the effecting group number “1” corresponding to the winning / replay winning number 1, An effect group number “1” corresponding to the winning / replay winning number 2 is determined at the address X + 2 (H), and an effect group number “2” corresponding to the winning / replaying winning number 3 is set at the address X + 3 (H). And an effect group number “k” corresponding to the winning / replay winning number i is determined at the address X + i (H).

  In the above-described example, the winning / replay winning number 1 and the winning / replay winning number 2 belong to the same effect group number “1”.

  Then, an effect group number is acquired from the effect group number designation table by an arithmetic process using the first register and the second register (specifically, an addition process of the first register and the second register). That is, the winning / replay winning number is used as an offset value, and the effect group number is acquired from the effect group number designation table in the register. Here, the acquired effect group number may be stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM. Thereafter, the production group number is saved (stored) in the ring buffer.

  With this configuration, mask processing is performed regardless of the main gaming state (specifically, the AT state or the non-AT state) or the pressing order number. The program of means can be simplified.

  When the process of step S56 is performed, the main control unit 100 starts the rotation of the reels 40L, 40C, and 40R by performing the reel stop management process (step S58), and the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R are operated. Then, stop control is performed for the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch. Here, the reel stop control is performed based on the operation flag generated based on the winning number. The operation flag is associated with each symbol combination shown in FIGS. 6 to 9 with flag information indicating whether or not to be a target of the pull-in control, and is determined by the role lottery process in step S18. Is generated based on the winning number and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM. In addition, when 4.1 seconds have not elapsed since the reel was rotated in the previous game when the start switch 36 was operated, the “reel rotation start standby” command is sub-controlled when 4.1 seconds have elapsed. Transmit to means 200. Each time the stop switch is operated, a reel rotation stop command corresponding to the operated stop switch is transmitted to the sub-control means 200.

  Next, when all the reels are stopped, the main control means 100 hides the information corresponding to the push order number displayed on the acquired number display 28 by the push order display process in step S38 (step S60). Specifically, the value of the display data stored in the RWM address F018 of the main control means 100 is updated to FFH. Then, display determination processing is performed to determine whether or not the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the winning line L matches any of the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 6 to 9 (step S62). Note that the order in which the processes of step S60 and step S62 are performed may be switched. Next, the main control unit 100 transmits a “display type” command and a “design combination display” command to the sub-control unit 200 based on the result of the display determination process. If the symbol combination stopped on the winning line L matches any of the winning symbol combinations (see FIGS. 7 to 9), the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the winning winning combination is displayed. Store at a predetermined address of RWM. Then, the hopper motor 46 is driven to perform a payout process for paying out the number of medals corresponding to the matched winning combination (step S64).

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the current number of credits has reached the maximum number (50). If the maximum number has been reached, the hopper motor 46 (see FIG. 3) of the medal payout device is driven to pay out one medal, and then the value of the data stored in the RWM address F018 (payout) “1” is added to “0” immediately before the delivery. Thus, when the first one is paid out, the display on the acquired number display 28 is “1”. Then, “1” is subtracted from the value of the medal payout number stored in the predetermined address, and it is determined whether or not the value of the medal payout number after subtraction is “0”. If the value of the medal payout number after subtraction is not “0”, it is determined again whether or not the current credit number has reached the maximum number (50).

  Thereafter, every time one medal is paid out, “1” is repeatedly added to the value stored in the address F018, and “1” is subtracted from the value of the medal payout number stored in the predetermined address. When the value of the medal payout number becomes “0”, the payout process in step S64 is terminated. As a result of this processing, the value displayed on the acquired number display unit 28 increases by “1” every time one medal is paid out, and when the medal payout is completed, the payout corresponding to the winning prize winning combination is completed. The number of copies is displayed.

  If the current credit number has not reached the maximum number at the start of the payout process, the value of the stored number display data stored in the address F019 is set to “1” without driving the hopper motor 46. Is added. Thereafter, as in the case of paying out medals by the medal payout device, “1” is added to the value stored in the address F018, and then “1” is calculated from the value of the medal payout number stored in the predetermined address. Subtract. When this processing is completed, it is determined again whether or not the current number of credits has reached the maximum number. If the number of credits has not reached the maximum number, it is stored again in the addresses F019 and F018. “1” is added to each value, and “1” is subtracted from the medal payout number value stored at a predetermined address. This series of processing is repeated until the payout number corresponding to the winning winning combination is paid out.

  Further, when the number of credits reaches “50” (that is, the maximum number of credits) in the middle of paying out medals, the medal payout device is controlled so as to pay out medals thereafter. For example, if the number of credits is “47” and a winning combination of 9 cards is won, the third card is credited and the fourth and subsequent cards (the remaining 6 cards) are paid out by the medal payout device.

  In the process of crediting the payout medal, the timing at which “1” is added to the values stored in the addresses F019 and F018 is the time when the hopper motor 46 pays out medals one by one. It is desirable to match the interval. For example, when the medal payout by the medal payout device is performed one by one every 100 milliseconds, the value of the stored number display data stored in the address F019 is incremented by “1” every 100 milliseconds. It is good to go.

As described above, for example, when there is a winning combination of 9 (when “9” is stored as the medal payout value stored in the predetermined address), and the stored number is less than 50 when,
i) A standby process of about 100 ms is performed,
ii) Add “1” to the value of the stored number display data stored in the address F019,
iii) Add “1” to the value of the acquired number display data stored in the address F018,
iv) Subtract the medal payout value (initially “9”) stored at a predetermined address;
By performing the processing in the order of processing, it is possible for the player to visually recognize how the value is updated by “1” in the credit number display 27 and the acquired number display 28.

  Here, in the case where the standby process of i) described above is not provided, for example, the change in the mode displayed on the acquired number display 28 reaches “9” from “0” instantaneously, and the displayed numerical value is displayed. It will be difficult to see the increase in the number of players, so the sense of relief and achievement will be lessened when the 9-card combination wins. For example, even when the number of credits reaches the upper limit in the middle of payout and the payout is performed by the medal payout device after that, the timing at which the display on the acquired number display 28 is updated becomes almost constant, so that the visually smooth Display can be updated.

  In the payout process of step SS64, a “game medal payout start” command is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 when the medal payout is started, and when the medal payout ends, the “game medal payout end” command is sent to the sub-control means 200. Send to.

  Next, the main control means 100 performs a game end check process (step S66), and performs main mode transition control and RT state transition control based on the stopped symbol combination and the like. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB01 is stopped and displayed, the BB signal and the RB signal are turned on via the external concentrated terminal board 84. In addition, a “game end display” command is transmitted to the sub-control means 200, and a “BB end” command is also transmitted to the sub-control means 200 when the bonus game ends.

  When one game is completed by the above process, the main control means 100 returns to the process of step S10 again and executes the process for the next game. Thus, in the game progress main process shown in FIG. 02, after the winning number is determined by the winning lottery process (step S18), the winning number is determined by the non-AT state process (step S24) or the AT state process (step S26). The push order number corresponding to the number is determined, but the push order number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 first (step S40), and then the production group number corresponding to the winning number is transmitted. (Step S54).

  Note that the mask process shown in step S52 may be omitted. In that case, the process of steps S46 to S52 may be omitted, and after the process of step S44 is performed, the process may directly move to the process of step S54. When all reels stop, the process of step S60 is performed and FFH is overwritten on address F018, but when the last stop switch is operated (third stop operation is performed), FFH is overwritten on address F018. May be.

<Description of non-AT state processing>
Next, the contents of the non-AT state process executed in step S24 of FIG. 27 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. When starting the non-AT state process in step S24, the main control means 100 first determines whether or not the current main mode is 3 (step S100). If the current main mode is 3, the determination result in step S100 is YES, and the process of predicting AT is performed (step S102). As a process during the AT precursor, for example, a shortened lottery for determining whether or not to shorten the AT precursor period is performed, and when winning the shortened lottery, a process for reducing the number of remaining games until the AT precursor period ends. And so on. When the process of step S102 is completed, the non-AT state process of FIG. 28 is terminated, and the process proceeds to the freeze lottery process of step S28 of FIG.

  If it is determined in step S100 that the current main mode is not 3, the determination result is NO, and it is determined whether or not the value of the chance zone game number CZCNT is 1 or more (step S104). Here, the chance zone is a gaming state in which an advantageous push order is notified or the possibility of shifting to a more advantageous main mode is increased. Note that the value of the chance zone game number CZCNT may be transmitted to the sub-control means 200 by a control command. If the value of CZCNT is 0 in the determination process of step S104, the determination result is NO and normal processing is performed. On the other hand, when the value of CZCNT is 1 or more, the determination result is YES, and processing in the chance zone is performed. The contents of processing in each gaming state will be described below separately for when the gaming state is normal and when in the chance zone.

(A) Normal processing When the determination result in step S104 is NO, the main control means 100 performs normal processing. First, the main control means 100 determines whether or not any of the winning numbers 1 to 30 is determined as the winning combination as a result of the winning lottery process executed in step S18 of FIG. 27 (step S106). If any of the winning numbers 1 to 30 is determined to be a winning combination, the determination result in step S106 is YES, and the main control unit 100 determines whether or not to shift from the normal state to the chance zone. A lottery is performed (step S108). Then, it is determined whether or not the chance zone lottery is won (step S110). If the chance zone lottery is not won, the determination result in step S110 is NO and the non-AT state processing in FIG. 28 is terminated. To do.

  On the other hand, if the chance zone lottery is won, the determination result in step S110 is YES, and the number of games γ, which is the chance zone period, is determined by lottery (step S112). Then, the number of games γ determined by lottery is stored in a predetermined storage area in the RWM (step S114), and the state of the chance zone transition flag stored in the RWM is updated to ON (step S116). The value of the chance zone game number γ and the on / off state of the chance zone transition flag may be transmitted to the sub-control means 200 by a control command.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not any of the winning numbers 31 to 35 (winnings -K to O) is determined as the winning combination as a result of the combination lottery process executed in step S18 of FIG. (Step S118). Here, when the determination result of step S106 is NO (winning numbers 1 to 30 have not been determined), the process immediately proceeds to the determination process of step S118. If none of the winning numbers 31 to 35 is determined in the determination process of step S118, the determination result is NO and the non-AT state process of FIG. 28 is terminated.

  On the other hand, if any of the winning numbers 31 to 35 is determined as the winning combination, the determination result in step S118 is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not to start the AT game. A lottery is performed (step S120). Then, it is determined whether or not the AT lottery is won (step S122). When the AT lottery is won, the determination result in step S122 is YES, and the value of the AT precursor game number δ is determined by lottery (step S124). . Then, the value of δ determined by the lottery is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM (step S126), the state of the AT precursor flag stored in the RWM is updated to ON (step S128), The AT state process is terminated. Note that the value of the AT precursor game number δ and the ON / OFF state of the AT precursor flag may be transmitted to the sub-control means 200 by a control command.

(B) Processing in Chance Zone When the determination result in step S104 is YES, the main control means 100 performs processing in the chance zone. First, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the current RT state is RT1 (step S130). If the current RT state is RT1, the determination result in step S130 is YES, and then whether or not the winning number 2 is determined as the winning combination as a result of the winning lottery process executed in step S18 in FIG. Judgment is made (step S132). When the winning number 2 (replay-B) is determined as the winning combination, the determination result in step S132 is YES, and the main control means 100 pushes the RWM address F01A to the sequential number 6 (right → middle → left). Save (step S134).

  Here, when the stop switch 37L, 37C, 37R is operated in the order of pressing right → middle → left when the winning number 2 is determined, depending on the operation timing, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 10 is “red” 7-red 7-red 7 "may be aligned (see FIG. 10A). Here, in this embodiment, when the determination result in step S132 is YES, in the step S134, the main control unit 100 determines the right → middle → left push order. You may make it determine in the sub-control means 200. FIG. In this case, the process of step S134 may store the push order number 0 (unknown) in the RWM address F01A and transmit it to the sub-control means 200. Further, when the sub-control means 200 notifies the pressing order, a message such as “Aim for Red 7!” May be notified to the player by an image or a voice together with the pressing order of the right → middle → left pressing order. . Further, in the sub-control means 200, for example, when the determined winning number is 0 (out of line), a notification of right-to-middle-to-left push order and "Aim for red 7!" May be performed.

  As described above, when the re-game player is elected that does not trigger the transition to the RT state depending on the stop display mode (the player does not change the profit / disadvantage according to the stop operation order), the main control means 100 presses the order number. The notification of the pressing order using the notification means such as the determination of the display number and the acquired display number LED is not performed, but a specific symbol combination (for example, “red 7-red 7-red 7”) is stopped and displayed as a production. When (for example, when the re-game player is elected, the AT lottery by the main control means 100 is favored or when the right of AT is obtained (hereinafter, when an advantageous result is obtained), When the re-game player wins the AT lottery or extra lottery executed by the main control means 100 before the game won (hereinafter also referred to as “when an advantageous result has been obtained”)), The control means 200 is Based on a command indicating that an advantageous result has been obtained in the game, or a command indicating that an advantageous result received prior to the game has been obtained, Can be notified.

  As described above, the game in which the main control unit 100 does not notify the push order and the sub control unit 200 notifies the push order is not limited to the chance zone, and any game state (during AT) May be included).

  In the determination process of step S132, if the winning number is not determined to be 2, the determination result is NO, and then whether any of the winning numbers 3 to 8 (re-games-C to H) is determined. Is determined (step S136). If the push order number is determined to be any of 3 to 8, the determination result in step S136 is YES, and one of the push orders in which the replay 05 does not win (see FIG. 10A). Then, the push order number corresponding to the selected push order is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S138).

  Here, the reason for notifying that the replay 05 does not win is the reason why, in RT1, the winning number 2 that triggers the AT lottery described later is determined as a winning combination with a probability of 1/32 (see FIG. 4). ), When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 05 is displayed and the process shifts to RT2 (see FIG. 13), the winning number 2 is not a lottery target, so the chances of AT lottery are reduced. . In this embodiment, the main control unit 100 determines the push order in which the replay 05 does not win, but the sub control unit 200 may determine the push order in which the replay 05 does not win. In this case, in the process of step S138, the push order number corresponding to the push order in which the replay 05 that is not to be notified is won is stored in the RWM address F01A and transmitted to the sub-control means 200, and the sub-control means 200 receives it. The pressing order other than the pressed order number may be appropriately selected and notified. Also in this case, since the sub-control unit 200 notifies the pressing order, the main control unit 100 updates the state of the pressing order flag stored in the RWM to ON (step S140). In the display process (step S38), step S632 (push order number display process) in FIG. 42 described later may not be performed.

  When the push order number 6 is stored in the RWM address F01A by the process of step S134, or the push order number corresponding to the push order that the replay 05 does not win is stored in the RWM address F01A by the process of step S138, The control means 100 updates the state of the push order flag stored in the RWM address F01A to ON (step S140). Thereby, when staying in RT1 in the chance zone, when the winning number 2 or 3 to 8 is won, the pressing order is notified.

  When the current RT state is not RT1 (step S130 (NO)), when the determined winning number is not any of 2 to 8 (step S136 (NO)), or when the process of step S140 is performed, Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the determined winning number is 2 or 31 to 35 (winnings -K to O) (step S142). If the determined winning number is neither 2 nor 31 to 35, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 ends the non-AT state processing of FIG.

  On the other hand, if the determined winning number is either 2 or 31 to 35, the determination result in step S142 is YES, and then it is determined whether or not the current main mode is 1. (Step S144). If the current main mode is 1, the determination result is YES, and a high-accuracy mode transition lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the main mode 2 is performed (step S146). Then, it is determined whether or not the high-accuracy mode transition lottery has been won (step S148). When the high-accuracy mode transition lottery is won, the determination result is YES and the high-accuracy mode transition stored in the RWM is determined. The flag state is updated to ON (step S150). Here, when the high probability mode transition flag is turned on, the main mode 1 is shifted to 2 by the game end check process described later (see FIG. 43, steps S668 to S670).

  When the state of the high-accuracy mode transition flag is updated to ON in the process of step S150, the processes after the AT lottery in step S120 described above are performed. When the current main mode is not 1 (step S144 (NO)) or when the high-precision mode shift lottery is not won (step S148 (NO)), the processing immediately after the AT lottery in step S120. I do. As described above, the AT lottery was performed only when the winning number determined during the normal period was any of 31 to 35 (combination probability was about 1 / 16.2) (step S118 (YES)). → S120) During the chance zone, even when the winning number 2 is determined, the AT lottery is performed, so it can be said that the player is in an advantageous state. Further, by changing the AT lottery table used for the AT lottery during CZ and during normal, the AT lottery during CZ may win the AT lottery with higher probability than the AT lottery during normal. Further, when the determined winning number is 2, if the player operates the stop switch according to the notification, and the symbol combination “red 7-red 7-red 7” is prepared, the AT lottery may be performed. As can be seen, the player can be expected to win the AT lottery.

  And the main control means 100 will complete | finish the non-AT state process of FIG. 28, if the process of step S120-S128 is performed.

<Description of AT status processing>
Next, the contents of the AT state process executed in step S26 of FIG. 27 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. When starting the AT state process in step S26, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the state of the AT flag stored in the RWM is on (step S160). If the state of the AT flag is on, the determination result in step S160 is YES, and an AT preparation process that will be described in detail later with reference to a detailed flowchart is performed (step S162). When the AT preparation process is performed, the AT state process in FIG. 29 is terminated, and the process proceeds to the freeze lottery process shown in step S28 in FIG.

  In the determination process of step S160, if the state of the AT flag is on, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 next until the specialized zone stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM is completed. It is determined whether or not the value of the remaining number of games TZCNT is 1 or more (step S164). Then, if the value of TZCNT is 1 or more, the determination result is YES, and after performing processing in the specialized zone that will be described in detail later with reference to a detailed flowchart (step S166), the AT state of FIG. The process ends.

  In the determination process of step S164, if the value of TZCNT is 0, the determination result is NO, and then the main control means 100 indicates that the state of the special zone transition flag stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM is It is determined whether or not it is turned on (step S168). If the state of the special zone transition flag is ON, the determination result is YES, and after performing the special zone preparation process which will be described in detail later with reference to a detailed flowchart (step S170), the AT of FIG. End state processing.

  On the other hand, in the determination process of step S168, if the state of the specialized zone transition flag is OFF, the determination result is NO, and after performing the AT process that will be described in detail later with reference to a detailed flowchart (Step S172), the AT state process of FIG. 29 is terminated.

<Description of AT preparation process>
Next, the contents of the AT preparation process executed in step S162 of FIG. 29 will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. The AT preparation process in this figure is a process of determining the push order number in accordance with the determined winning number in each of the RT states of non-RT and RT1 to RT4. Hereinafter, the contents of processing performed in each RT state will be described.

(A) Processing in Non-RT When the main control means 100 starts the AT preparation process in step S162 shown in FIG. 29, it is first determined whether or not the current RT state is non-RT (step S180). . Then, if the current RT state is non-RT, the determination result is YES, and hereinafter, the push order number determination process corresponding to the winning number in non-RT is performed. That is, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the winning number determined by the winning lottery process in step S18 of FIG. 27 is any of 3 to 8 (re-games -C to H) (step S182). . If the determined winning number is any of 3 to 8, the determination result is YES, and the push order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 05 are aligned according to the determined winning number (FIG. 10 ( a) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S184).

  On the other hand, in the determination process of step S182, if the determined winning number is not any of 3 to 8, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 next determines whether or not the determined winning number is 21. Is determined (step S186). In addition, also when the process of step S184 mentioned above is completed, it transfers to the process of step S186. If the determined winning number is 21, the determination result is YES, and the push order number 1 (left → middle → right) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S188). If the determined winning number is not 21 in the determining process in step S186, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 then determines whether the determined winning number is any of 22-30. It is determined whether or not (step S190). In addition, also when the process of step S188 mentioned above is complete | finished, it transfers to the process of step S190. If the determined winning number is any of 22 to 30, the determination result is YES, and the push order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to winnings 01 to 03 are aligned according to the determined winning number (FIG. 11). (See) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S192).

  When the process of step S192 is completed, or the determination result of step S190 is NO (the determined winning number is not any of 22 to 30), the main control means 100 displays the special symbols 01 to 03 next. Determine the push order number that may be played. That is, when the determined winning number is 36 (winning-P) (step S194 (YES)), the push order number 8 (medium first stop operation) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S196). When the determined winning number is 37 (winning-Q) (step S198 (YES)), the push order number 9 (first stop operation on the right) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S200) and determined. If the winning number is 38 (winning-R) (step S202 (YES)), the push order number 7 (first left stop operation) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S204). Then, after performing the process of step S204, or when the determination result of step S202 is NO, the AT preparatory process in FIG. 30 and the AT state process in FIG. 29 are terminated as it is, and step S28 in FIG. The process proceeds to the freeze lottery process.

  As described above, in the non-RT during AT preparation, the pressing order in which the nine winning combinations win and the pressing order in which the specific symbols 01 to 03 may be displayed (that is, the transition to RT1) may be notified. Will be.

(B) Processing in RT1 In the determination processing in step S180, if the RT state is any of RT1 to RT4, the determination result is NO, and then the main control means 100 determines whether or not the current RT state is RT1. Is determined (step S206). If the current RT state is RT1, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 has the winning number determined by the lottery process in step S18 of FIG. 27 as 2 (replay-B). Whether or not (step S208). If the determined winning number is 2, the determination result is YES, and the push order number 1 (left → middle → right) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S210).

  Here, the push order number 1 is stored when the winning number is 2, and when the stop switch is operated in the order of right → middle → left push, “red 7-red 7-red This is because there is a possibility that the symbol combination of “7” will be aligned. During the AT preparation, even if the winning number is 2, some profit (for example, adding the remaining number of games of the AT game) is not given, so “Red 7-Red 7-Red 7” This is in order not to give a false expectation that some kind of profit will be given to the player as a result of the combination of symbols.

  In addition, during AT preparation, when the game before winning number 2 wins, the AT lottery is won again and AT rights are further granted (the number of AT games increases or the number of AT executions increases). Dare to operate the stop switch in the order of right → middle → left on the sub-control means so that the symbol combination of “Red 7-Red 7-Red 7” is stopped and displayed, and Red 7 You may comprise so that it may alert | report. As a result, the player can grasp that the number of executions of the AT increases, and the expectation can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the determination process of step S208, if the determined winning number is not 2, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 next determines whether the determined winning number is any of 3-8. It is determined whether or not (step S212). In addition, also when the process of step S210 mentioned above is completed, it transfers to the process of step S212. If the determined winning number is any of 3 to 8, the determination result is YES, and the push order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 05 are aligned according to the determined winning number (FIG. 10 ( a) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S214).

  Here, in the non-AT state processing of FIG. 28, since AT is not yet started (that is, main modes 1 to 3), even if the winning number is any of 3 to 8 in CZ, In order to increase the number of AT lottery opportunities, the push order that the replay 05 does not win is notified so as to remain at RT1 (see step S138 in FIG. 28). However, in the AT state process, since the AT can be started (that is, the main mode 4), when the winning number is any of 3 to 8, the combined winning probability of the re-gamer is In order to shift to RT2 (see FIG. 4) that dramatically improves, the pressing order in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 05 is displayed is notified.

  When the process of step S214 is completed, or when the determination result of step S212 is NO (the determined winning number is not any of 2 to 8), the main control unit 100 next sets the RT state to RT1. The process proceeds to the common process 1 that is executed in common at the time of? 4 (step S216). The common process 1 will be described in detail later with reference to a detailed flowchart. When the common process 1 in step S216 is completed, the AT preparation process in FIG. 30 and the AT state process in FIG. 29 are terminated, and the process proceeds to the freeze lottery process in step S28 in FIG.

  Thus, in RT1 during AT preparation, the pressing order in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 05 in which the RT state shifts to RT2 is displayed is notified.

(C) Processing in RT2 In the determination processing in step S206, if the RT state is any of RT2 to RT4, the determination result is NO, and then the main control means 100 determines whether the current RT state is RT2. Is determined (step S218). If the current RT state is RT2, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines that the winning number determined by the role lottery process in step S18 in FIG. N) is determined (step S220). When the determined winning number is any of 9 to 14, the determination result is YES, and the push order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 06 are aligned according to the determined winning number (FIG. 10 ( The push order number of b) is saved in the RWM address F01A (step S222).

  Then, when the process of step S222 ends, or when the determination result of step S220 is NO (the determined winning number is not any of 9 to 14), the main control means 100 next proceeds to step S216. When the common process 1 is completed and the common process 1 is completed, the AT preparation process in FIG.

  In this way, in RT2 during AT preparation, the pressing order in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 06 in which the RT state shifts to RT3 is displayed is notified.

(D) Processing in RT3 In the determination processing in step S218, if the RT state is RT3 or 4, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 then proceeds to the processing of the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, it is first determined whether or not the current RT state is RT3 (step S230). If the current RT state is RT3, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines that the winning number determined by the lottery process in step S18 of FIG. T) is determined (step S232). If the determined winning number is any of 15 to 20, the determination result is YES, and the push order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 08 are aligned according to the determined winning number (FIG. 10 ( (c) (refer to step 2) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S234).

  Then, when the process of step S234 is completed, or when the determination result of step S232 is NO (the determined winning number is not any of 15 to 20), the main control unit 100 next selects FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the common process 1 of step S216 shown in FIG. 30, and when the common process 1 is completed, the AT preparation process in FIG.

  In this way, in RT3 during AT preparation, the pressing order in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 08 in which the RT state shifts to RT4 is displayed is notified.

(E) Processing in RT4 In the determination processing in step S230, if the RT state is RT4, the determination result is NO. In this case, next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the winning number determined by the winning lottery process in step S18 of FIG. 27 is 1 (replay-A) (step S236). If the determined winning number is 1, the determination result is YES, and one of the push order numbers 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 15A is determined by lottery (step S238). The determined push order number is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S240). Here, when the winning number is 1, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 01 is displayed regardless of the pressing order, so the pressing order to be notified from the nine pressing orders is appropriately set. Has been decided. When the winning number is 1, the main controller does not have to determine the push order by lottery. Further, although the main control means does not draw the push order, the sub control means may decide the push order by lottery and notify the determined push order.

  Then, when the process of step S240 is completed or when the determination result of step S236 is NO (the determined winning number is not 1), the main control means 100 next performs the process in step S18 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the winning number determined by the role lottery process is any one of 15 to 20 (re-games -OT) (step S242). If the determined winning number is any of 15 to 20, the determination result is YES, and the push order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 08 are aligned according to the determined winning number (FIG. 10 ( (c) (refer to step 2) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S244).

  When the process of step S244 is completed, or when the determination result of step S242 is NO (the determined winning number is not any of 15 to 20), the main control means 100 next performs step S216 shown in FIG. When the common process 1 is completed and the common process 1 is completed, the AT preparation process in FIG.

  Thus, in RT4 during AT preparation, when the winning number is any of 15 to 20, the symbol combination corresponding to replay 06 is displayed, so that the RT state does not shift to RT3 ( 13), the pressing order in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 08 is displayed is notified.

(Description of common processing 1)
Next, with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 32, the contents of the common process 1 that is executed in common at the time of RT1 to 4 in the AT preparation process will be described. When the main control means 100 proceeds to step S216 in FIG. 30, the main control means 100 starts the process of the flowchart shown in FIG. 32. First, the winning number determined by the lottery process in step S18 in FIG. 27 is 21 (winning-A). Is determined (step S250). If the determined winning number is 21, the determination result is YES and the push order number 1 (left → middle → right) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S252).

  When the process of step S252 ends, or when the determination result of step S250 is NO (the determined winning number is not 21), the main control means 100 next determines that the determined winning number is 22 to It is determined whether or not any of 30 (step S254). If the determined winning number is any of 22 to 30, the determination result is YES, and the push order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to winnings 01 to 03 are aligned according to the determined winning number (FIG. 11). (See) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S256).

  When the process of step S256 is completed, or when the determination result of step S254 is NO (the determined winning number is not any of 22 to 30), the main control means 100 next shifts the RT state to RT1. In order not to miss, the pressing order number in which the special symbols 01 to 03 are not displayed is determined. That is, when the determined winning number is 36 (winning-P) (step S258 (YES)), the push order number 7 (first left stop operation) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S260). When the determined winning number is 37 (winning-Q) (step S262 (YES)), the push order number 8 (medium first stop operation) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S264) and determined. If the winning number is 38 (winning-R) (step S266 (YES)), the push order number 9 (first right stop operation) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S268). Then, after performing the process of step S268, or when the determination result of step S266 is NO, the common process 1 of FIG. 25 is terminated as it is, the AT preparation process of FIG. 30 and the AT state process of FIG. And the process proceeds to the freeze lottery process in step S28 in FIG.

<Explanation of special zone processing>
Next, the contents of the special zone processing executed in step S166 of FIG. 29 will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. In the special zone processing in this figure, in each RT state of non-RT and RT1 to 4, in addition to the process of determining the pressing order number according to the determined winning number, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the AT game An extra process is performed to increase the number of remaining games. Here, the number of games added to the remaining number of games is also referred to as “the number of added games”. Hereinafter, the contents of processing performed in each RT state will be described.

(A) Processing in Non-RT When the main control means 100 starts the specialized zone processing in step S166 shown in FIG. 29, it is first determined whether or not the current RT state is non-RT (step S280). ). If the current RT state is non-RT, the determination result is YES, and processing in non-RT is performed thereafter.

  First, the main control means 100 performs the same process as steps S180 to S204 in the AT preparation process of FIG. 30, and stores the push order number corresponding to the winning number in the RWM. That is, when the winning number is determined to be any one of 3 to 8 (step S282 (YES)), the pressing order number of the pressing order in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 05 is arranged is stored in the address F01A of the RWM ( Step S284). If the winning number is determined to be 21 (step S286 (YES)), the push order number 1 (left → middle → right) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S288). If the winning number is determined to be any of 22 to 30 (step S290 (YES)), the pressing order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to winnings 01 to 03 are aligned according to the determined winning number (see FIG. 11). ) Are stored in the RWM address F01A (step S292).

  Furthermore, when the determined winning number is 36 (winning-P) (step S294 (YES)), the push order number 8 (medium first stop operation) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S296). If the determined winning number is 37 (winning-Q) (step S298 (YES)), the push order number 9 (right first stop operation) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S300) and determined. If the winning number is 38 (winning-R) (step S302 (YES)), the push order number 7 (first left stop operation) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S304).

  After the above process is performed and the winning number is stored in the RWM, the main control unit 100 performs the above-described addition process. First, it is determined whether or not the determined winning number is any one of 1 to 38 (step S306). Here, if the winning number 0 (out of line) is determined, the determination result is NO, the special zone processing in FIG. 33 is terminated, the AT state processing in FIG. 29 is also terminated, and FIG. The process proceeds to the freeze lottery process in step S28.

  On the other hand, if the selection number is any one of 1 to 38, the determination result in step S306 is YES, and the added game number α is determined according to the winning number (step S308). Here, as the additional game number α corresponding to the winning number, for example, in the lottery table shown in FIG. 4, the winning number having a lower winning probability may be increased, or the value of the additional game number α may be increased. In the case of determining the number α, the probability that the value of the added number α increases as the winning number having a lower winning probability may be increased. Further, when the additional game number α is determined by lottery, an additional lottery table corresponding to each RT state is prepared, and the additional game number α is determined based on the additional lottery table corresponding to the current RT state. Good. As a result of the processing in step S308, the value of α is always added to the number of games played by the AT if any combination is won in the specialized zone.

  When the additional game number α is determined by the process of step S308, the main control means 100 stores the determined additional game number α in the ring buffer (step S310). By this process, the number of added games is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 prior to the winning / replay winning number stored in the ring buffer by the process of step S54 in the game progress main of FIG. Then, the value of the game number α is added to the value of the AT game number ATCNT stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM (step S312), and the special zone processing in FIG. 33 is ended.

(B) Processing in RT1 In the determination processing in step S280, if the RT state is any of RT1 to RT4, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 next determines whether the current RT state is RT1. Is determined (step S314). If the current RT state is RT1, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 performs the same processing as steps S208 to S214 of the AT preparation processing shown in FIG. That is, if the winning number determined by the role lottery process in step S18 of FIG. 27 is 2 (replay-B) (step S316 (YES)), the push order number 1 is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S316). S318) If the determined winning number is any one of 3 to 8 (step S320 (YES)), the pushing order number of the pushing order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to replay 05 are aligned is stored in RWM address F01A. (Step S322).

  Then, the common process 1 shown in FIG. 32 is executed (step S324). When the common process 1 is completed, the addition process shown in steps S306 to S312 is performed, and then the special zone in-process shown in FIG. Exit.

(C) Processing in RT2 In the determination processing in step S314, if the RT state is any of RT2 to RT4, the determination result is NO, and then the main control means 100 determines whether the current RT state is RT2. Is determined (step S326). If the current RT state is RT2, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 performs the same processing as steps S220 to S222 of the AT preparation processing shown in FIG. That is, if the winning number determined by the winning lottery process in step S18 of FIG. 27 is any of 9-14 (step S328 (YES)), the pressing order of the pressing order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 06 are aligned. The number is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S330).

  Then, the common process 1 shown in FIG. 32 is executed (step S324). When the common process 1 is completed, the addition process shown in steps S306 to S312 is performed, and then the special zone in-process shown in FIG. Exit.

(D) Processing in RT3 In the determination processing in step S326, if the RT state is RT3 or 4, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 then proceeds to the processing of the flowchart shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the RT state is RT3 (step S340). If the current RT state is RT3, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines that the winning number determined by the lottery process in step S18 of FIG. T) (step S342 (YES)), the push order number of the push order in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 06 is aligned according to the determined winning number (see FIG. 10C) is set in the RWM. Save to address F01A (step S344).

  Therefore, the RT state is maintained at RT3 when the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 06 are prepared by operating the stop switch in accordance with the notified pressing order of the player. This is because, for example, in step S308 in FIG. 33, when the additional game number α is determined by performing a lottery based on the lottery table corresponding to the current RT state, When it is easy to select an additional game number α that is larger than the state, a push order advantageous to the player is notified. Also, during the specialized zone, when the production is controlled so that the production varies depending on the RT state, when the production specific to RT3 is executed, the player is more likely to touch the unique production. , Can contribute to improving the fun of the game.

  When the process of step S344 ends, or when the determination result of step S342 is NO (the determined winning number is not any of 15 to 20), the main control unit 100 proceeds to step S324 of FIG. Then, the common process 1 shown in FIG. 32 is executed. When the common process 1 is completed, the addition process shown in steps S306 to S312 of FIG. 33 is subsequently performed, and then the special zone processing in FIG. 33 is terminated.

(E) Processing in RT4 In the determination processing in step S340, when the RT state is RT4, the determination result is NO. In this case, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the winning number determined by the winning lottery process in step S18 of FIG. 27 is 1 (replay-A) (step S346). If the determined winning number is 1, the determination result is YES, and one of the pressing order numbers 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 15A is determined by lottery (step S348). The sequence number is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S350).

  In addition, when the determined winning number is any one of 15 to 20 (re-games -OT) (step S352 (YES)), the symbol corresponding to the re-play 06 according to the determined winning number. The push order numbers in the push order in which the combinations are aligned (see FIG. 10C) are stored in the RWM address F01A (step S354). Then, the process proceeds to step S324 in FIG. 33, the common process 1 shown in FIG. 32 is executed, and the addition process shown in steps S306 to S312 in FIG. Exit.

  As described above, in the special zone processing, the AT game addition processing is always performed in any RT state.

<Explanation of special zone preparation process>
Next, the contents of the special zone preparation process executed in step S170 of FIG. 29 will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. The special zone preparation is in a state from the time of winning the special zone transfer lottery until the shift to the special zone in AT games. As will be described later, when the special zone transfer lottery is won, the special zone transfer flag is turned on. When the special zone transfer flag is on, if the winning number is determined as any of 9 to 20, the special zone transfer flag is turned on. Transition to a zone. Hereinafter, the contents of processing performed in each RT state will be described.

(A) Processing in non-RT When the main control means 100 starts the specialized zone preparation processing in step S170 shown in FIG. 29, it is first determined whether or not the current RT state is non-RT (step S360). If the current RT state is non-RT, the determination result is YES, and processing in non-RT is performed thereafter.

  First, the main control means 100 performs the same process as steps S180 to S204 in the AT preparation process of FIG. 30, and stores the push order number corresponding to the winning number in the RWM. That is, when the winning number is determined to be any one of 3 to 8 (step S362 (YES)), the pressing order number of the pressing order in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 05 is arranged is stored in the address F01A of the RWM ( Step S364). If the winning number is determined to be 21 (step S366 (YES)), the push order number 1 (left → middle → right) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S368). Further, when the winning number is determined to be any of 22 to 30 (step S370 (YES)), the pressing order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to winnings 01 to 03 are aligned according to the determined winning number (see FIG. 11). ) Are stored in the RWM address F01A (step S372).

  Furthermore, when the determined winning number is 36 (winning-P) (step S374 (YES)), the push order number 8 (medium first stop operation) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S376), When the determined winning number is 37 (winning-Q) (step S378 (YES)), the push order number 9 (first stop operation on the right) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S380) and determined. If the winning number is 38 (winning-R) (step S382 (YES)), the push order number 7 (first left stop operation) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S384).

  When the above processing is performed, the main control means 100 finishes the special zone preparation processing in FIG. 35, further finishes the AT state processing in FIG. 29, and proceeds to the freeze lottery processing in step S28 in FIG. .

(B) Processing in RT1 In the determination processing in step S360, when the RT state is any of RT1 to RT4, the determination result is NO, and then the main control means 100 determines whether or not the current RT state is RT1. Is determined (step S386). If the current RT state is RT1, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 performs the same processing as steps S208 to S214 of the AT preparation processing shown in FIG. That is, if the winning number determined by the role lottery process in step S18 in FIG. 27 is 2 (replay-B) (step S388 (YES)), the push order number 1 is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S388). S390) If the determined winning number is any one of 3 to 8 (step S392 (YES)), the pushing order number of the pushing order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 05 are arranged is stored in the RWM address F01A. (Step S394).

  Then, the common process 1 shown in FIG. 32 is executed (step S402). When the common process 1 is finished, the special zone preparation process shown in FIG. 35 is finished.

(C) Processing in RT2 In the determination processing in step S386, if the RT state is any of RT2 to RT4, the determination result is NO, and then the main control means 100 determines whether or not the current RT state is RT2. Is determined (step S396). If the current RT state is RT2, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 performs the same processing as steps S220 to S222 of the AT preparation processing shown in FIG. That is, if the winning number determined by the winning lottery process in step S18 of FIG. 27 is any of 9 to 14 (step S398 (YES)), the pressing order of the pressing order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 06 are aligned. The number is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S400).

  Then, the common process 1 shown in FIG. 32 is executed (step S402). When the common process 1 is finished, the special zone preparation process shown in FIG. 35 is finished.

(D) Processing in RT3 In the determination processing in step S396, if the RT state is RT3 or 4, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 then proceeds to the processing of the flowchart shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the RT state is RT3 (step S410). If the current RT state is RT3, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines that the winning number determined by the lottery process in step S18 of FIG. T) (step S412 (YES)), the push order number of the push order (see FIG. 10C) in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 06 are aligned according to the determined winning number is set to RWM. Save to address F01A (step S414). Thus, when the player operates the stop switch in accordance with the notified pressing order, the symbol combinations corresponding to the re-game 06 are aligned, and the RT state is maintained at RT3.

  Thereby, in the specialization zone, when determining the added game number α by performing lottery based on the lottery table corresponding to the current RT state, the lottery table used at RT3 is compared with other RT states, If the larger number of games α is set so that it can be easily selected, as described above, the RT state is maintained at RT3 and then the transition to the specialized zone can be advantageous to the player. it can.

  When the process of step S414 ends, or when the determination result of step S412 is NO (the determined winning number is not any of 15 to 20), the main control unit 100 proceeds to step S402 of FIG. Then, the common process 1 shown in FIG. 32 is executed. When the common process 1 is finished, the special zone preparation process in FIG. 35 is finished.

(E) Processing in RT4 In the determination processing in step S410 of FIG. 36, if the RT state is RT4, the determination result is NO. In this case, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the winning number determined by the winning lottery process in step S18 of FIG. 27 is 1 (replay-A) (step S416). If the determined winning number is 1, the determination result is YES, and one of the pressing order numbers 1 to 9 shown in FIG. 15A is determined by lottery (step S418). The sequence number is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S420).

  In addition, when the determined winning number is any one of 15 to 20 (replay-OT) (step S422 (YES)), the symbol corresponding to the replay 06 is determined according to the determined winning number. The push order numbers in the push order in which the combinations are aligned (see FIG. 10C) are stored in the RWM address F01A (step S424). Thereby, in the specialization zone, when determining the added game number α by performing lottery based on the lottery table corresponding to the current RT state, the lottery table used at RT3 is compared with other RT states, If an additional game number α is set so that a larger value can be easily selected, it is advantageous to the player by shifting the RT state to RT3 and then shifting to the specialized zone as in the case described above. be able to. Then, the process proceeds to step S402 in FIG. 35, and after executing the common process 1 shown in FIG. 32, the special zone preparation process in FIG. 35 is terminated.

<Description of AT processing>
Next, the contents of the in-AT process executed in step S172 of FIG. 29 will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. Hereinafter, the contents of processing performed in each RT state will be described.

(A) Processing in Non-RT When the main control means 100 starts the in-AT processing in step S172 shown in FIG. 29, it is first determined whether or not the current RT state is non-RT (step S460). When the current RT state is non-RT, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines that the winning number determined by the lottery process in step S18 of FIG. 27 is 3 to 8 (re-game-C ~ H) is determined (step S462). If the determined winning number is any of 3 to 8, the determination result is YES, and the push order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 05 are aligned according to the determined winning number (FIG. 10 ( a) is saved in a predetermined storage area of the RWM (step S464).

  On the other hand, in the determination process of step S462, if the determined winning number is not any of 3 to 8, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 then determines which of the determined winning numbers is 21 to 30. The common process 2 for determining the pressing order is performed (step S466). The common process 2 is a process that is also executed at RT1 to RT4, and will be described in detail later with reference to a detailed flowchart. After completing the common process 2 in step S466, the main control means 100 determines the pressing order number in which the special symbols 01 to 03 may be displayed next.

  That is, when the determined winning number is 36 (winning-P) (step S468 (YES)), the push order number 8 (medium first stop operation) is stored in the address F01A of the RWM (step S470), When the determined winning number is 37 (winning-Q) (step S472 (YES)), the push order number 9 (right first stop operation) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S474) and determined. If the winning number is 38 (winning-R) (step S476 (YES)), the push order number 7 (first left stop operation) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S478).

  After performing the process of step S478, or when the determination result of step S476 is NO, the main control means 100 does not perform the process of step S478 and the determined winning number is any of 31 to 35. It is determined whether or not (step S480). And when the determined winning number is any of 31-35, the main control means 100 performs the special zone transfer process which determines whether it transfers to a special zone. That is, a special zone transfer lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a special zone is performed (step S482), and it is determined whether or not a special zone transfer lottery is won (step S484). If the lottery is not the special zone transfer lottery, the determination result in step S484 is NO, the AT process in FIG. 37 is terminated, the AT state process in FIG. 29 is also terminated, and the freeze lottery in step S28 in FIG. Transition to processing.

  On the other hand, when the special zone transfer lottery is won, the determination result in step S484 is YES, and the state of the special zone transfer flag stored in the RWM is updated to ON (step S486). Thus, in the AT state process of FIG. 29, the determination result of step S168 is YES, and the specialized zone preparation process (see FIGS. 35 and 36) of step S170 is performed. When the process of step S486 is completed, the main control unit 100 ends the in-AT process of FIG.

  Note that the on / off state of the special zone shift flag described above may be transmitted to the sub-control unit 200, and the sub-control unit 200 may perform a corresponding effect during the special zone preparation.

(B) Processing in RT1 In the determination processing in step S460, if the RT state is any of RT1 to RT4, the determination result is NO, and then the main control means 100 determines whether the current RT state is RT1. Is determined (step S488). If the current RT state is RT1, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 performs the same processing as steps S208 to S214 of the AT preparation processing shown in FIG. That is, if the winning number determined by the role lottery process in step S18 in FIG. 27 is 2 (replay-B) (step S490 (YES)), the push order number 1 is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S490). S492) If the determined winning number is any one of 3 to 8 (step S494 (YES)), the push order number of the push order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to replay 05 are aligned is stored in RWM address F01A. (Step S496).

  Then, the common process 2 executed in step S466 is executed (step S504), and then the common process 3 for avoiding the display of the specific symbols 01 to 03 is executed (step S506). This common process 3 is a process that is also executed in the case of RT1 to RT4 (however, it is not executed only in the case of winning number 1 in RT4), and will be described in detail later with reference to a detailed flowchart. After completing the common process 3 in step S506, the main control unit 100 proceeds to step S480 and performs the specialized zone transition process described above.

(C) Processing in RT2 In the determination processing in step S488, if the RT state is any of RT2 to RT4, the determination result is NO, and then the main control means 100 determines whether the current RT state is RT2. Is determined (step S498). If the current RT state is RT2, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 performs the same processing as steps S220 to S222 of the AT preparation processing shown in FIG. That is, if the winning number determined by the combination lottery process in step S18 of FIG. 27 is any of 9 to 14 (step S500 (YES)), the pressing order of the pressing order in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 06 are aligned. The number is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S502).

  When the process in step S502 is completed, the common process 2 in step S504 and the common process 3 in step S506 are executed, and the process proceeds to step S480 to perform the specialized zone transfer process described above.

(D) Processing in RT3 In the determination processing in step S498, if the RT state is RT3 or 4, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 then proceeds to the processing of the flowchart shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the RT state is RT3 (step S510). If the current RT state is RT3, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines that the winning number determined by the lottery process in step S18 of FIG. T) (step S512 (YES)), the push order number of the push order in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 08 is aligned according to the determined winning number (see FIG. 10 (c)) is set in the RWM. Save to address F01A (step S514). As a result, when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 08 is prepared by operating the stop switch in accordance with the notified pressing order of the player, the RT state shifts to RT4.

  When the process of step S514 ends, or when the determination result of step S512 is NO (the determined winning number is not any of 15 to 20), the main control unit 100 proceeds to step S504 of FIG. Then, after the common process 2 is executed, the common process 3 in step S506 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S480 to perform the specialized zone transfer process described above.

(E) Processing in RT4 In the determination processing in step S510 in FIG. 38, if the RT state is RT4, the determination result is NO. In this case, when the winning number determined by the winning lottery process in step S18 of FIG. 27 is 15 to 20 (replay game -OT) (step S512 (YES)), the main control means 100 determines. The push order number of the push order (see FIG. 10C) in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 08 are arranged according to the winning number is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM (step S518). As a result, when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 08 is prepared by operating the stop switch in accordance with the notified pressing order of the player, the RT state shifts to RT4. Then, the process proceeds to step S504 in FIG. 37 and the common process 2 is executed, then the common process 3 in step S506 is performed, and the process further proceeds to step S480 to perform the specialized zone transfer process described above.

  In the determination process of step S516, when the determined winning number is not any of 15 to 20, the determination result is NO, and then the main control means 100 is determined by the role lottery process in step S18 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the winning number is 1 (replay-A) (step S520). If the determined winning number is not 1, the determination result is NO, and the main control unit 100 proceeds to step S504 in FIG. 37 and executes the common process 2, and then executes the common process 3 in step S506. Further, the process proceeds to step S480, and the specialized zone transfer process described above is performed.

  On the other hand, if the determined winning number is 1, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 selects any one of the push order numbers 1 to 9 shown in FIG. Determination is made by lottery (step S522), and the determined push order number is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S524). Next, the main control means 100 performs an extra lottery to determine whether or not to increase the number of remaining AT games (step S526), and determines whether or not the extra lottery is won (step S528). If the winning lottery is not won, the determination result is NO, the AT process and the AT state process of FIG. 29 are terminated, and the process proceeds to the freeze lottery process of step S28 in the game progress main process of FIG.

  On the other hand, when the winning lottery is won, the determination result in step S528 is YES, and the main control means 100 performs the same processing as steps S308 to S312 in the specialized zone processing shown in FIG. That is, the added game number α is determined according to the winning number (step S530), and after the determined additional game number α is stored in the ring buffer (step S532), the number of AT games stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM The value of the number of games α is added to the value of ATCNT and added (step S534). Here, the method of determining the added game number α in accordance with the winning number in step S530 is the same as in step S308 described above.

  When the process of step S534 is completed, the AT process and the AT state process of FIG. 29 are terminated, and the process proceeds to the freeze lottery process of step S28 in the game progress main process of FIG.

  Note that the above-described addition processing of steps S526 to S534 is executed when the winning number that can be determined only at RT4 is 1. As described above, since the addition process is performed only in the case of RT4, when the determined winning number is 15 to 20, the notification corresponding to the replay 04 or the replay 06 is ignored as a result of ignoring the notified push order. If the combination is complete and the process has shifted to RT1 or RT3, there is no possibility of an extra lottery. For this reason, the possibility that the player operates the stop switch in accordance with the notified pressing order is increased. In the present embodiment, the winning number that can be determined only at RT4 is 1 as the trigger for the extra process. However, the winning number that can be determined at other times than RT4 may be the trigger for the extra process. However, in cases other than RT4, it is desirable to set the winning probability extremely low.

  In addition, in the above-described addition process, the added game number α is determined when the additional lottery is won (step S528, YES → S530), but in the additional lottery in step S526, an additional game number lottery including 0 is performed. The lottery result may be added to the value of ATCNT. Further, when the added game number α is determined, it is added to the value of ATCNT immediately after that. However, the determination of the added game number α and the timing of adding it to the value of ATCNT may be performed in a subsequent game. For example, it may be determined by lottery how many games will be added to the added game number α, and when the determined number of games has elapsed, the added game number α may be added to the value of ATCNT.

  Further, instead of the number of added games, the remaining AT game number is transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200 every game, and the sub control unit 200 is based on the difference from the remaining AT game number in the previous game. The occurrence of an extra and the number of extra games may be determined.

(Description of common processing 2)
Next, with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 39, the contents of the common process 2 that are executed in common in the non-RT and RT1 to RT4 steps in steps S466 and S504 of the in-AT process shown in FIG. First, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the winning number determined by the winning lottery process in step S18 of FIG. 27 is 21 (winning-A) (step S540). If the determined winning number is 21, the determination result is YES, and the push order number 6 (right → middle → left) is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM (step S542). Thereby, when the player operates the stop switch according to the notified pressing order, the symbol combination “bell-bell-bell” corresponding to the winning 02 is prepared (see FIGS. 11 and 7). When the sub-control unit 200 determines the push order to be notified, the push order number 9 (right → middle → left) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM in step S542. Processing in the case where the sub-control means 200 determines the push order will be described later.

  When the process of step S542 ends, or when the determination result of step S540 is NO (the determined winning number is not 21), the main control means 100 next determines that the determined winning number is 22 ~. 27 (winnings -B to G) is determined (step S544). If the determined winning number is any of 22 to 27, the determination result is YES, and a pushing order game lottery for determining whether or not to perform a pushing order game described later is performed (step S546). ).

  Here, the pushing order hitting game is a game for challenging whether or not the player can hit the pushing order in which nine winning combinations win. If the player is placed in a winning order for winning 9 cards, the player will be given AT gaming rights (so-called stock generation), and will receive extra benefits such as adding the number of AT games remaining. You may make it do. The types of push order hitting games are six-choice push order hitting games that allow the player to select which push order can win nine out of six different pressing orders, and the first stop operation. There is an alternative push order game in which only the stop switch is notified to the player and the second stop operation is selected from the remaining two stop switches. The push order game lottery performed in step S546 has three options: a push order game is not performed (losing), a six-option push-order game is performed, and a two-choice push-order game is performed. Select one from

  If the push order hitting game lottery is performed in step S546, the main control means 100 next determines whether or not the push order hitting game lottery is won (step S548). And if it is won (if it is decided to play a six-or-one or two-or-one push order game), the judgment result will be YES, and the push order number corresponding to the won push order game will be displayed as RWM Is stored in the address F01A (step S550). That is, when it is determined to play the six-choice push order hitting game, the push order number 13 (see FIG. 15A) is stored in the RWM address F01A. When the sub-control means 200 receives this push order number, for example, the image display device indicates the push order of “?-?-?” (Indicating that the player determines the stop switch for the first to third stop operations). 70.

  If it is determined to play an alternative push order hitting game, one of the push order numbers 10 to 12 (see FIG. 15A) is stored in the address F01A of the RWM. Specifically, when the winning number 22 or 23 (winning-B or C) is determined, the push order number 10 is stored in the address F01A of the RWM. When the sub-control means 200 receives this push order number, for example, the push order of “1-?-?” (Indicating that the first stop operation of the left stop switch 37L) is displayed on the image display device 70. When the winning number 24 or 25 (winning-D or E) is determined, the push order number 11 is stored in the RWM address F01A. When the sub-control means 200 receives this push order number, the push order of “? -1-?” (Indicating that the middle stop switch 37C is first stopped) is displayed on the image display device 70, for example. When the winning number 26 or 27 (winning-F or G) is determined, the push order number 12 is stored in the RWM address F01A. When the sub-control means 200 receives this push order number, for example, the push order of “?-?-1” (indicating that the right stop switch 37R is first stopped) is displayed on the image display device 70.

  On the other hand, when the game is shifted to the push order winning game lottery, the determination result in step S550 is NO, and the push order number corresponding to the push order in which the winning prizes 01 to 03 win is stored in the address F01A of the RWM (step S552). . Next, when the result of determination in step S544 is NO (the determined winning number is not any of 22 to 27), or when the process of step S550 or S552 is performed, the main control means 100 Then, it is determined whether or not the determined winning number is 28 to 30 (step S554). If the determined winning number is not any of 28 to 30, the determination result is NO and the common process 2 of FIG. 39 is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the winning number is determined to be 28 to 30, the determination result in step S554 is YES, and a 6-option navigation lottery is performed to determine whether or not 6-option navigation is performed (step S556). Here, if the predetermined stop switch is operated for the first stop, the winning numbers 28 to 30 will win 9 winning combinations regardless of which stop switch is operated after the second stop operation (see FIG. 11). . Therefore, if only the stop switch to be operated for the first stop is informed, the player can win 9 winning combinations, but the 6-option navigation described above should be further operated for the second and third stop as part of the production. A stop switch is also informed. Therefore, after the second stop operation, even if a stop switch different from the stop switch notified by the 6-choice navigation is operated, the 9 winning combination wins.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the 6-choice navigation lottery performed in step S556 has been won (step S558). If it has been won, the determination result is YES, corresponding to winnings 01 to 03. A pressing order including the stop switch of the first stop operation in which the symbol combinations are aligned is determined (step S560). That is, when the winning number is determined to be 28, either left → middle → right or left → right → middle is selected. If the winning number is determined to be 29, either middle → left → right or middle → right → left is selected. Further, when the winning number is determined to be 30, one of right → left → middle or right → middle → left is selected. Then, the push order number corresponding to the push order determined in step S560 is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM (step S562), and the common process 2 in FIG. 39 is ended.

  Further, in the determination process of step S558, if the 6-option navigation lottery is deviated, the determination result is NO, and the push order number (7 corresponding to the push order in which the winning prizes 01 to 03 are won according to the determined winning number). Are stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM (step S564), and the common process 2 of FIG. 39 is terminated.

  In the determination process of step S544, when the pushing order game is not performed when the winning number is determined to be any of 22 to 27, the process of steps S546 to S550 is omitted, and the determination result of step S544 is When YES is determined, the process may immediately proceed to step S552. Also, in the determination process of step S554, when the 6-option navigation is not performed when the winning number is determined to be 28 to 30, the process of steps S556 to S562 is omitted, and the determination result of step S554 is YES. When it becomes, it may be immediately shifted to step S564.

  Furthermore, in the case of implementing the 6-option navigation, the stop switches to be operated for the second and third stop have been determined by the process of step S560, but these stop switches may be determined by the sub-control means 200. In this case, the main control means 100 transmits a stop switch of the first stop operation (that is, any one of the push order numbers 7 to 9) for winning the nine winning combination to the sub control means 200, and the sub control means 200 performs the second operation. The stop switch for the third stop operation is determined.

(Description of common processing 3)
Next, with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 40, the contents of the common process 3 that is commonly executed at RT1 to 4 in step S506 of the AT process shown in FIG. 37 will be described. First, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the winning number determined by the winning lottery process in step S18 of FIG. 27 is 36 (winning-P) (step S570). When the determined winning number is 36, the determination result is YES, and the push order number 7 (first left stop) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S572). If the determination result in step S570 is NO (the winning number is not 36) or the processing in step S572 is finished, the main control means 100 next has the determined winning number 37 (winning-Q). It is determined whether or not (step S574). If the determined winning number is 37, the determination result is YES, and the push order number 8 (medium first stop) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S576).

  Furthermore, if the determination result in step S574 is NO (winning number is not 37), or when the processing in step S576 is completed, the main control means 100 then determines that the determined winning number is 38 (winning-R). It is determined whether or not (step S578). If the determined winning number is 38, the determination result is YES, and the push order number 9 (first right stop) is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S580). Then, when the process of step S580 is completed, or when the determination result of step S578 is NO (winning number is not 38), the common process 3 in FIG. 40 is immediately terminated.

  By performing the common process 3 as described above, when the winning number is determined to be 36 to 38, if the player operates the stop switch in accordance with the informed push order, nine winning combinations (winning prizes) (Any one of Q to R) wins and the display of special symbols 01 to 03 can be avoided, so that the current RT state (any one of RT1 to 4) does not shift to non-RT ( (See FIG. 13).

  Note that in the common process 3 described above, the player is notified of the stop switch that should be the first stop operation as the pressing order in which the nine winning combinations win, but for example, step S560 in the common process 2 in FIG. Six-choice navigation may be performed by performing the same processing as S562. In this case, the stop switch to be operated to stop the second and third may be determined not by the main control unit 100 but by the sub control unit 200.

<Description of freeze lottery processing>
Next, the contents of the freeze lottery process executed in step S28 of FIG. 27 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. When the main control means 100 starts the freeze lottery process of step S28, whether or not the winning number determined by the winning lottery process in step S18 of FIG. 27 is any of 22 to 27 (winnings -B to G). Is determined (step S590). If the determined winning number is any of 22 to 27, the determination result is YES and the main control means 100 performs the first freeze lottery (step S592). In the first freeze lottery, one of the freeze effect is not executed (disconnected), the freeze effect A is executed (winning 1), or the freeze effect B is executed (winning 2). The probability that the freeze effect A is executed is higher than that of the freeze effect B.

  Then, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the first freeze lottery has been won (step S594). When the first freeze lottery is won, the determination result is YES and the freeze determined to be executed. A freeze number corresponding to the type of effect is determined (step S596). That is, the freeze number is set to 1 when execution of freeze effect A is determined, and the freeze number is set to 2 when execution of freeze effect B is determined. When the first freezing lottery is deviated, the determination result is NO and the freeze number is set to 0 (step S598). Then, the freeze number determined by the process of step S596 or S598 is stored in the ring buffer (step S600), the freeze lottery process shown in FIG. 41 is terminated, and the process proceeds to the determination process of step S30 of FIG.

  In the determination process of step S590 described above, if the determined winning number is not any of 22 to 27, the determination result is NO, and then the main control means 100 determines whether the determined winning number is 32 or not. It is determined whether or not (step S602). If the determined winning number is not 32, the determination result is NO, the process proceeds to step S598 described above, the freeze number is set to 0, the process proceeds to step S600, and freeze number 0 is stored in the ring buffer. After that, the freeze lottery process shown in FIG. 41 is terminated, and the process proceeds to the determination process in step S30 of FIG.

  On the other hand, when the winning number is determined to be 32, the determination result is YES and the second freeze lottery is performed (step S604). This second freeze lottery determines either one of not performing the freeze effect (disappearance) or executing the freeze effect B (winning). The probability that execution of freeze effect B is selected in the second freeze lottery is set higher than the probability of executing freeze effect A or B in the first freeze lottery in step S592.

  Then, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the second freeze lottery has been won (step S604). When the second freeze lottery is won, the determination result is YES and the freeze number is set to 2 (step 604). S608). That is, when the second freeze lottery is won, the freeze effect B is always executed. And freeze number 2 is preserve | saved in a ring buffer (step S610), the freeze lottery process shown in FIG. 41 is complete | finished, and it transfers to the judgment process of FIG.27 S30. If the second freezing lottery is deviated, the determination result in step S606 is NO, the main control means 100 moves to the processing in step S596, sets the freezing number to 0, and the processing in step S6600 results in the freezing number. 0 is stored in the ring buffer.

  The freeze lottery process described above is executed in step S28 of the game progress main process shown in FIG. 27, and the winning / replay winning number (or mask number) is stored in the ring buffer by the process in step S54 of FIG. At an early stage, the freeze number is stored in the ring buffer. As a result, the freeze number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 prior to the winning / replay winning number and the item winning number.

<Description of push order display processing>
Next, the content of the push order display process executed in step S38 of FIG. 27 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. First, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the ON / OFF state of the push order flag stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM is ON (step S630). If the push order flag is on, the push order number is determined based on the winning / replay winning number. Specifically, the determination is made based on the push order number designation table for setting the push order number stored in the ROM and the winning / replay winning number (step S631).

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the push order number designation table has a push order number corresponding to the winning / replay winning number. For example, the address Y has a winning / replay winning prize. The push order number “0” corresponding to the number 0 is determined, the push order number “0” corresponding to the winning / replay winning number 1 is determined for the address (Y + 1), and the winning / replaying is set for the address (Y + 2). A push order number “0” corresponding to the game winning number 2 is determined, a push order number “1” corresponding to the winning / replay winning number 3 is determined for the address (Y + 3), and a winning is assigned to the address (Y + 4). A push order number “2” corresponding to the replay winning number 4 is defined, and a push order number “n” corresponding to the winning / replay winning number L is defined in the address (Y + L).

  Here, the corresponding push order number means that the winning / replay winning number corresponds to the replaying combination and the RT is changed as a trigger for changing the RT (winning numbers 3 to 20). Refers to the pushing order number of the advantageous pushing order for the winning combination, the winning prize / replay winning number corresponds to the small part, and the payout which differs depending on the operation order (winning numbers 22 to 38) is the most. It refers to the push order number of an advantageous push order for winning a winning combination with many payouts.

  As detailed processing, a winning / replay winning number is stored in a first register (for example, A register), a head address of a push order number designation table is stored in a second register (for example, HL register), The push order number is acquired from the push order number designation table by the arithmetic processing of the second register and the second register. Specifically, the A register is added to the HL register, and the address data obtained by the addition is acquired in the A register. The obtained push order number is stored in the RWM address F01A (step S632).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the obtained push order number is 0 (step S633). When the main control means 100 determines that the push order number is not 0 (NO), a predetermined value (E0H) is added to the obtained push order number (step S634), and data indicating the addition result is stored in the RWM address. Store in F018 (step S635). The data stored in the RWM address F018 by this processing becomes an offset value for designating the display mode corresponding to the pressing order number on a predetermined display (acquired number display 28).

  On the other hand, when the main control unit 100 determines that the push order number is 0 (YES) in the judgment process of step S633, the push order of FIG. 42 is not performed without performing the processes of steps S634 and S635. The display process ends. Thereby, the data stored in the address F018 is not updated, and the display content of the acquired number display device 28 is maintained in the state at the start of the game.

  As described above, in the case of a game for notifying the push order, the push order number is determined using the push order number designation table with the winning / replay winning number stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM as an offset value. Thereby, it is possible to determine the push order number and the information for notifying the push order number using a predetermined display by a simple process without squeezing the capacity of the program.

  In FIG. 28 to FIG. 40, the push order is determined for each individual process and the push order is saved. However, “Save push order number” in FIGS. The process of actually storing the push order numbers is performed by the process shown in FIG. Of course, as shown in FIGS. 28 to 40, the pressing order may be determined for each individual process, and the pressing order may be stored. When the push order numbers are displayed by the four LEDs shown in FIG. 15C, the push order numbers are represented by binary numbers, and the digit indicating the value of “0” is turned off and “1” is displayed. The display mode is to light up the digit indicating the value. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 15 (d), the segments a to g of the 7-segment display are associated with each bit when the push order number and the winning number are expressed in binary numbers. , The bit indicating the value of “0” is turned off and the bit indicating the value of “1” is turned on.

  When the offset value of the display mode indicating the push order number is stored in the RWM address F018 by the process of step S635, the main control unit 100 ends the push order display process shown in FIG. The process proceeds to step S40 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the determination process in step S630, if the push order flag is off, the determination result is NO, and the display content (information on the push order number) displayed on the predetermined display by the process in step S635. ) Is stored in the RWM address F018 (step S636). Here, as a method of hiding the information about the push order number, for example, as shown in FIG. 15B, when the push order number is displayed on the acquired number display 28, the value “00” is displayed. May be displayed or may be turned off. Further, in the case of the four LEDs shown in FIG. Further, when the determination result in step S630 is NO, the push order display process in FIG. 42A may be immediately terminated without performing step S636.

  The offset value for displaying the push order number on the acquired number display 28 is stored in the RWM address F018 of the main control means 100 (the same address as the payout number display and error code display). The dedicated address may be provided, and an offset value for displaying the push order number may be stored in the dedicated address. Further, the offset value for displaying the push order number on the acquired number display 28 may be data stored in the RWM address F01A for storing the push order number data (in this case, the upper digit is turned off or 0 is displayed). ) Further, the offset value for displaying the push order number on the acquired number display 28 may be a value obtained by adding a specific value (for example, E0H) to the data stored in the RWM address F01A for storing the push order number data.

<Description of game end check processing>
Next, the contents of the game end check process executed in step S66 of FIG. 27 will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. The game end check process can be broadly divided into a process for controlling the transition of the main mode and a process for controlling the transition of the RT state.

(A) Main mode transition control (a-1) Processing in main mode 1 When the main control means 100 starts the game end check processing, it is first determined whether or not the current main mode is 1 (step S640). . When the main mode is 1, the determination result in step S640 is YES, and the main control unit 100 determines whether the on / off state of the AT precursor flag stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM is on. (Step S642). If the AT precursor flag is on, the determination result is YES, and the current main mode value stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM is updated from 1 to 3 (step S644).

  Then, the value of the AT precursor game number δ stored in the RWM by the process of step S126 of the non-AT state process shown in FIG. 28 is read (step S646), and the AT precursor game number ATZCNT for counting the AT precursor game number. The value of δ is set to the value of (step S648). Also, the state of the AT precursor flag stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM is updated to OFF (step S650), and the state of the chance zone transition flag (hereinafter also referred to as “CZ transition flag”) is also updated to OFF. (Step S652).

  Next, the main control means 100 clears the value of the chance zone game number CZCNT stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM to 0 (step S654), and the high-accuracy mode transition flag stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM. Is updated to OFF (step S656). And the state of the push order flag memorize | stored in RWM is updated to OFF (step S658), and RT transfer process demonstrated in detail later with reference to a detailed flowchart is performed (step S660). When the RT transition process in step S660 is finished, the game end check process in FIG. 43 is finished, that is, the game end check process in step S66 of the game progress main shown in FIG. 27 is finished and the next game is started. The process proceeds to the game start process in step S10.

  Next, in the determination process of step S642 described above, if the state of the AT precursor flag is OFF, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines the number of chance zone games CZCNT stored in the RWM (FIG. 28). In step S662, it is determined whether or not the value of step S104 in FIG. If the value of the chance zone game number CZCNT is 1 or more, the determination result is YES, and 1 is subtracted from the stored CZCNT value (step S664). Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the state of the chance zone transition flag (hereinafter also referred to as “CZ transition flag”) stored in the RWM is on (step S666). If the value of CZCNT is 0 in the determination process of step S662, the determination result is NO, and the determination process of step S666 is immediately performed without performing the process of step S664.

  In the determination process of step S666, if the state of the CZ transition flag is ON, the determination result is YES, and the value of the chance zone game number γ stored in the RWM in step S114 of FIG. 28 is read (step S668). Then, the value of the number of games CZCNT in the chance zone stored in the RWM is updated to γ (step S670), and the state of the CZ transition flag stored in the RWM is updated to off (step S672). Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the state of the high-accuracy mode transition flag stored in the RWM is on (step S674). If the determination result in step S666 is NO (CZ transition flag is OFF), the process proceeds to the determination process in step S674 without performing the processes in steps S668 to S672.

  If it is determined in step S674 that the state of the high-accuracy mode transition flag is on, the current main mode value stored in the RWM is updated from 1 to 2 (step S678). Then, the value of the remaining number of games MM2CNT that can stay in the main mode 2 is updated to 20 (step S680). Then, the process proceeds to the process of step S656 described above, the state of the high-accuracy mode transition flag is turned off, the process proceeds to step S658, the state of the push order flag is turned off, and the RT transition process of step S660 is completed. The game end check process 43 (step S66 in FIG. 20) ends, and the process proceeds to the game start process in step S10 to start the next game. If the high-accuracy mode transition flag is OFF in the determination process of step S674, the determination result is NO, and the process proceeds to step S656 without performing the processes of steps S678 to S680.

(A-2) Processing in main mode 2 In the determination processing in step S640 described above, if the current main mode is any one of 2 to 4, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 then It is determined whether or not the main mode is 2 (step S682). When the main mode is 2, the determination result in step S682 is YES, and the main control means 100 determines whether or not the on / off state of the AT precursor flag stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM is on. (Step S684). If the AT precursor flag is ON, the determination result is YES and the current main mode value stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM is updated from 2 to 3 (step S686).

  Then, the value of the AT precursor game number δ stored in the RWM is read in the same manner as the process of step S646 (step S688), and the value of δ is set in the counter for counting the AT precursor game number (step S690). Further, the state of the AT precursor flag stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM is updated to OFF (step S692), and the state of the CZ transition flag is also updated to OFF (step S694). Next, the value of the chance zone game number CZCNT stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM is cleared to 0 (step S696), and the value of MM2CNT described above is also cleared to 0 (step S698). Then, the process proceeds to step S658, the state of the push order flag stored in the RWM is updated to OFF, the RT transition process in step S660 is executed, and then the game end check process in FIG. 43 is terminated.

  Next, in the determination processing in step S682 described above, if the state of the AT precursor flag is OFF, the determination result is NO, and the main control unit 100 determines whether the value of CZCNT stored in the RWM is 1 or more. It is determined whether or not (step S700). If the value of CZCNT is 1 or more, the determination result is YES, and 1 is subtracted from the stored value of CZCNT (step S702). Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the state of the CZ transition flag stored in the RWM is on (step S704). In the determination process of step S700, if the value of CZCNT is 0, the determination result is NO, and the determination process of step S704 is immediately performed without performing the process of step S702.

  In the determination process of step S704, if the state of the CZ transition flag is on, the determination result is YES, and the value of the chance zone game number γ stored in the RWM is read (step S706) and stored in the RWM. The value of CZCNT is updated to γ (step S708). Then, the state of the CZ transition flag is updated to OFF (step S710), and 1 is subtracted from the value of MM2CNT stored in the RWM (step S712). If the determination result in step S704 is NO (the CZ transition flag is OFF), the process proceeds to step S712 without performing the processes in steps S706 to S710.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the value of MM2CNT is 1 or more (step S714). If the value of MM2CNT is 0, the determination result is NO and the current main mode is updated to 1. (Step S716). Then, the process proceeds to step S658, the state of the push order flag stored in the RWM is updated to OFF, the RT transition process in step S660 is executed, and then the game end check process in FIG. 43 is terminated. On the other hand, in the determination process of step S714, if the value of MM2CNT is 1 or more, the determination result is YES, and the process immediately proceeds to step S658 to turn off the state of the push order flag stored in the RWM. The process proceeds to step S660, and after executing the RT transition process, the game end check process of FIG. 43 is terminated.

(A-3) Processing in the main mode 3 In the determination processing in step S682 described above, if the current main mode is either 3 or 4, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 next displays the determination result in FIG. The process of the flowchart of FIG. That is, it is first determined whether or not the current main mode is 3 (step S720). When the main mode is 3, the determination result in step S720 is YES, and the main control means 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the AT precursor game number ATZCNT stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM (step S722).

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the value of the AT precursor game number ATZCNT is 1 or more (step S726). If the value of ATZCNT is 1 or more, the determination result is YES, the state of the push order flag stored in the RWM is turned off (step S726), and the RT transition process of step S660 of FIG. 43 is performed. On the other hand, when the value of ATZCNT is 0, the determination result is NO, the push order flag is turned on (step S728), and the current RT state is updated from 3 to 4 (step S730). ), The process proceeds to step S660 in FIG. Note that the order in which the processes of step S728 and step S73 are performed may be switched.

(A-4) Processing in main mode 4 In the determination processing in step S720 described above, if the current main mode is 4, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 stores the current RT stored in the RWM. It is determined whether the state is either RT5 or 6 (step S732). If the current RT state is either RT5 or 6, the determination result is YES, and RT transition processing in step S660 of FIG. 43 is performed. As described above, in this embodiment, when the current RT state is either RT5 or 6, even if the AT flag is on, the remaining number of games in the AT game is not changed. Even so, the AT flag is not updated off.

  On the other hand, if the current RT state is non-RT or RT1 to RT4, the determination result is NO, and it is next determined whether or not the state of the AT flag stored in the RWM is on. Judgment is made (step S734). Here, the AT flag is a flag indicating whether or not an AT game is being played. When the flag is on, it indicates that an AT game is being played. When the flag is off, the AT game is not being played. The following description is divided into processing performed when the AT flag is on and processing performed when the AT flag is off.

(Process when AT flag is off)
When the AT flag is off in the determination process of step S734, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines that the winning number determined by the winning lottery process in step S18 of FIG. ~ T) is determined (step S736). Here, winning numbers 15 to 20 may be won at RT3 or 4 (see FIG. 4), and the symbol combinations of replay 08 that transition from RT3 to RT4 are displayed according to the pressing order. (See FIGS. 10C and 13).

  In the determination process of step S736, if the winning number is not determined to be any of 15 to 20, the determination result is NO, and then the push order number stored in the RWM address F01A (that is, in this game) It is determined whether or not the value of the notified push order number) is any one of 1 to 9 (step S738). If any push order number (or push order corresponding to the push order number) has been notified, the determination result is YES, and then the push order number stored in the RWM and the stop actually operated by the player It is determined whether or not the switch pressing order matches (step S740).

  In the determination process of step S740, if the pressing order number stored in the RWM does not match the pressing order of the stop switch actually operated by the player, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines that the RWM The state of the AT flag stored in the predetermined storage area is updated to ON (step S742). In the process of step S742, control for turning on the AT signal output to the outside via the external concentrated terminal board 84 shown in FIG. 3 may be performed. In addition, the AT signal may be output when the AT flag is on and the RT state shifts to a specific RT (for example, RT4). If the winning number is determined to be any one of 15 to 20 in the determination process in step S736 described above, the determination result is YES, and the process in step S742 is immediately performed.

  Then, the main control means 100 sets 50 to the value of the AT gaming game number ATCNT for counting the number of games in the AT game stored in the RWM (step S744), and the RT transition of step S660 in FIG. Proceed to processing. Note that, in the determination process of step S738, when the determination result is NO (when the push order number is 0 or 10-13), or when the determination result is YES in the determination process of step S740 ( When the player operates the stop switch in the notified pressing order), the process immediately proceeds to step S660 of FIG. 43 without performing the processes of steps S742 and S744, and performs the RT transition process.

  Thus, in the main mode 4, when the winning number is determined to be any of 15 to 20 in the role lottery process (step S736 (YES)), it is determined to be any other than the winning numbers 15 to 20, and When the stop switch is not operated in accordance with the notified pressing order, the AT game is started. Here, in the main mode 4 (step S720, NO), when the AT flag is off (step S734, NO), if the winning number is determined to be any one of 15 to 20 (replay O to T) (step) The reason why the AT flag is turned on without determining the coincidence between the notified pressing order and the operated pressing order is to prevent the advantageous state from continuing indefinitely.

  That is, the winning numbers 15 to 20 may be determined even when the RT state is RT3, and RT3 is set to have a very high combined winning probability of the re-gamer as in RT4 (FIG. 4). Here, the transition condition from RT3 to RT4 is winning of replay 08 (see FIG. 13). The end condition of the main mode 4 is to digest a predetermined number of games (50 games + additional game number) after the AT game is started (see FIG. 14). Therefore, for example, when it is determined that the AT game start condition is “replay 08 wins when any of replays O to T is determined” (see FIG. 10C), RT3 and main mode In the state of 4, if the player avoids the replay 08 winning, the winning probability of the replay is very high (RT3), and the pushing order in which the 9 winning combination wins is notified. It becomes possible to maintain the state (see common process 1 (FIG. 31) in the AT preparation process of FIG. 30). For this reason, in this embodiment, when any one of the replays O to T is determined in the combination lottery process, the AT flag is turned on regardless of whether or not the replay 08 has won.

(Process when AT flag is on)
In the determination process of step S734, when the AT flag is on, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 determines that the value of the remaining number of games TZCNT until the specialization zone stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM ends. It is determined whether the number is 1 or more (step S746). When the value of TZCNT is 1 or more, the determination result is YES, and after subtracting 1 from the value of TZCNT (step S748), the process proceeds to step S660 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the value of TZCNT is 0 in the determination process of step S746, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 is in the state of the specialized zone transition flag stored in the RWM. Whether or not (step S750). When the state of the special zone transition flag is OFF, the determination result is NO, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the AT gaming game number ATCNT stored in the RWM (step S752). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of ATCNT is 1 or more (step S754). If it is 1 or more, the determination result is YES, and the process proceeds to step S660 in FIG. 43 to perform the RT transition process. On the other hand, when the value of ATCNT is 0, the determination result is NO, and processing for ending the AT game is performed.

  That is, the state of the AT flag stored in the RWM is updated to OFF (step S756), and a main mode transition lottery for determining which of the main modes 1 and 2 is to be performed is performed (step S758). In the process of step S756, control for turning off the AT signal output to the outside via the external concentrated terminal board 84 shown in FIG. 3 may be performed. Further, in the main mode transition lottery performed in step S758, the probability of transition to the main mode 1 is set higher than the probability of transition to the main mode 2. However, each probability is, for example, the set value or Depending on the winning number determined in the game, it may be different. If the main mode 2 lottery is won in the main mode transition lottery in step S758, the determination result is YES and the information indicating the current main mode stored in the RWM is updated to the main mode 2 (step S762). On the other hand, when the main mode 1 is won, the determination result is NO, and the information indicating the current main mode is updated to the main mode 1 (step S764). When the process of step S762 or S764 is performed, the main control means 100 updates the state of the push order flag stored in the RWM to OFF (step S766), and proceeds to step S660 in FIG. 43 to perform the RT transition process. Do.

  If the state of the specialized zone transition flag stored in the RWM is ON in the determination processing in step S750 described above, the determination result is YES, and is determined by the role lottery processing in step S18 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the winning number is any one of 9 to 20 (replay-J to N, O to T) (step S736). Here, the winning numbers 9 to 14 may be won at RT2 (see FIG. 4), and the symbol combinations of the replay 06 that shifts from RT2 to RT3 are displayed according to the pressing order ( (Refer FIG.10 (b) and FIG. 13). In addition, the winning numbers 15 to 20 may be won at RT3 or 4 (see FIG. 4), and the symbol combinations of the replay 08 that shifts from RT3 to RT4 are displayed according to the pressing order. (See FIGS. 10C and 13).

  In the determination process of step S768, if the winning number is not determined to any of 9 to 20, the determination result is NO, and then the push order number stored in the RWM address F01A (that is, in this game) It is determined whether the value of the notified push order number) is any one of 1 to 9 (step S770). If any push order number (or push order corresponding to the push order number) has been reported, the determination result is YES, and the push order number stored in the RWM and the stop switch actually operated by the player It is determined whether or not the order of pressing matches (step S772).

  In the determination process in step S772, if the push order number stored in the RWM does not match the push order of the stop switch actually operated by the player, the decision result is NO, and the main control means 100 The state of the specialized zone transition flag stored in the predetermined storage area is updated to off (step S774). When the winning number is determined as any of 9 to 20 in the determination process in step S768 described above, the determination result is YES and the process in step S774 is immediately performed.

  Next, the main control means 100 sets 10 to the value of the remaining number of games TZCNT until the specialization zone ends (step S776), and subtracts 1 from the value of the AT game number ATCNT stored in the RWM. (Step S778), the process proceeds to step S660 in FIG. 43 to perform the RT transition process. Here, when the special zone shift flag is ON, if the winning number is determined to be any one of 9 to 20 (replay J to N, O to T) (step S736, YES), the notified press The reason why the value of TZCNT is set to 10 without determining the coincidence between the order and the operated push order is to avoid the advantageous state from continuing indefinitely.

  Basically, when the special zone shift flag is on, the remaining number of games in the AT game is not subtracted even if the AT flag is on. Therefore, for example, if it is determined that the transition to the specialized zone is “replay 06 will be awarded when any of replays J to N and O to T is determined”, the winning number is 9 to 20 ( If the player is determined to be one of the replays I to T), if the player avoids winning the replay 06, it is possible to maintain a state in which the remaining number of AT games is not subtracted. Because it ends up.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is NO in the determination process of step S770 (when the push order number is 0 or 10-13), or if the determination result is YES in the determination process of step S772 ( When the player operates the stop switch in the notified push order), the process immediately proceeds to step S660 of FIG. 43 without performing the processes of steps S774 to S778, and performs the RT transition process.

(B) RT transition process Next, the contents of the RT transition process of step S660 in the game end check process of FIG. 43 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 45 and FIG.

(B-1) Processing in non-RT or RT1 When the main control means 100 starts the RT transition processing in step S660 shown in FIG. 43, the RT transition processing shown in FIG. 45 is started. It is determined whether it is non-RT or RT1 (step S792). If the current RT state is non-RT or RT1, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 then determines that the winning number determined by the lottery process in step S18 of FIG. -C to H) is determined (step S794). If the determined winning number is not any of 3 to 8, the determination result is NO, the process proceeds to step S830, and common processing 4 described later is executed.

  In the determination process of step S794, if the determined winning number is any of 3 to 8, the determination result is YES and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 05 (see FIG. 6B) is the winning line L It is determined whether or not they have been aligned (step S796). If the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 05 is not prepared on the winning line L, the determination result is NO, the RT transition process of FIG. 45 is terminated, and the game end check process of FIG. 43 is also terminated. The process proceeds to step S10 of 27. On the other hand, when the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 05 are prepared on the winning line L, the determination result is YES, and the current RT state stored in the RWM is updated from RT1 to RT2 (step S798). ), The RT transition process in FIG. 45 is terminated.

(B-2) Processing in RT2 In the determination processing in step S792, if the current RT state is any of RT2-6, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 is the current stored in the RWM. It is determined whether or not the RT state is RT2 (step S800). If the current RT state is RT2, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 then determines that the winning numbers determined by the role lottery process in step S18 in FIG. N) is determined (step S802). If the determined winning number is not any of 9 to 14, the determination result is NO, the process proceeds to step S830, and common processing 4 described later is executed.

  In the determination process in step S802, if the determined winning number is any of 9 to 14, the determination result is YES, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 06 (see FIG. 6B) is the winning line L. It is determined whether or not they are aligned (step S804). When the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 06 are arranged on the winning line L, the determination result is YES, and the current RT state stored in the RWM is updated from RT2 to RT3 (step S806), and FIG. The RT migration process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 06 is not prepared on the winning line L, the determination result is NO, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 02 (see FIG. 6B) is next. It is determined whether or not the winning lines L are aligned (step S808). When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 02 is prepared on the winning line L, the determination result is YES, and the current RT state stored in the RWM is updated from RT2 to RT1 (step S810), and FIG. The RT migration process is terminated. On the other hand, when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 02 is not prepared on the winning line L, the determination result is NO and the RT transition process of FIG. 45 is ended as it is.

(B-3) Processing in RT3 If the current RT state is any of RT3 to RT6 in the determination processing in step S800, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 stores the current stored in the RWM. It is determined whether or not the RT state is RT3 (step S812). If the current RT state is RT3, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 then determines that the winning number determined by the lottery process in step S18 of FIG. T) is determined (step S814). If the determined winning number is not any of 15 to 20, the determination result is NO, the process proceeds to step S830, and common processing 4 described later is executed.

  In the determination process of step S814, if the determined winning number is any of 15 to 20, the determination result is YES, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 08 (see FIG. 6B) is the winning line L. It is determined whether or not they are aligned (step S816). When the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 08 are prepared on the winning line L, the determination result is YES, the current RT state stored in the RWM is updated from RT3 to RT4 (step S818), and FIG. The RT migration process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 08 is not prepared on the winning line L, the determination result is NO, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 04 (see FIG. 6B) is next. It is determined whether or not they are aligned on the winning line L (step S820). When the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 04 are prepared on the winning line L, the determination result is YES, the current RT state stored in the RWM is updated from RT3 to RT1 (step S822), and FIG. The RT migration process is terminated. On the other hand, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 04 is not prepared on the winning line L, the determination result is NO and the RT transition process of FIG. 45 is ended as it is.

(B-4) Processing in RT4 In the determination processing in step S812, when the current RT state is any of RT4 to RT6, the determination result is NO, and the main control unit 100 stores the current stored in the RWM. It is determined whether or not the RT state is RT4 (step S824). If the current RT state is RT4, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 then determines that the winning number determined by the lottery process in step S18 of FIG. T) is determined (step S828). If the determined winning number is not any of 15 to 20, the determination result is NO, the process proceeds to step S830, and common processing 4 described later is executed.

  In the determination process of step S828, if the determined winning number is 15 to 20, the determination result is YES, and it is determined whether or not the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 06 are aligned on the winning line L. (Step S832). When the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 06 are arranged on the winning line L, the determination result is YES, and the current RT state stored in the RWM is updated from RT4 to RT3 (step S834), and FIG. The RT migration process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 06 is not aligned on the winning line L, the determination result is NO, and then whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 04 is aligned on the winning line L. Is determined (step S836). When the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay 04 are prepared on the winning line L, the determination result is YES, the current RT state stored in the RWM is updated from RT4 to RT1 (step S838), and FIG. The RT migration process is terminated. On the other hand, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 04 is not prepared on the winning line L, the determination result is NO and the RT transition process of FIG. 45 is ended as it is.

(B-5) Processing in RT5 In the determination processing in step S824, if the current RT state is RT5 or 6, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines that the current RT state stored in the RWM is It is determined whether it is RT5 (step S840). If the current RT state is RT5, the determination result is YES, and then the main control means 100 determines whether or not the symbol combinations corresponding to BB01 (see FIG. 6A) are aligned on the winning line L. Judgment is made (step S842). When the symbol combination corresponding to BB01 is prepared on the winning line L, the determination result is YES, the current RT state stored in the RWM is updated from RT5 to RT6 (step S844), and the RT transition of FIG. 45 is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to BB01 is not aligned on the winning line L, the determination result is NO and the RT transition process of FIG. 45 is terminated as it is. In the process of step S844, control for turning on the BB signal output to the outside via the external concentrated terminal board 84 shown in FIG. 3 may be performed.

(B-6) Processing in RT6 In the determination processing in step S840, if the current RT state is RT6, the determination result is NO, and the main control means 100 determines the total number of medals paid out during the bonus game. It is determined whether or not 450 sheets have been exceeded (step S846). If the total number of paid-out medals does not exceed 450, the determination result is NO and the RT transition process of FIG. 45 is terminated as it is. In contrast, when the total number of medals paid out exceeds 450, the determination result is YES, and the main control means 100 updates the current RT state stored in the RWM from RT6 to non-RT. (Step S848). In the process of step S848, control for turning off the BB signal output to the outside via the external concentrated terminal board 84 shown in FIG. 3 may be performed.

  Then, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the current main mode is 4 (step S850). If the current main mode is not 4, the determination result is NO and the RT of FIG. End the migration process. On the other hand, if the current main mode is 4, the determination result in step S850 is YES, and after the state of the push order flag stored in the RWM is updated to ON (step S852), FIG. The RT migration process is terminated.

(Description of common processing 4)
Next, with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 46, the contents of the common process 4 that is executed in common in the case of non-RT and RT1 to RT4 in step S380 of the RT transition process shown in FIG. 45 will be described. First, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the winning number determined by the winning lottery process in step S18 of FIG. 27 is any of 36 to 38 (winning-P to R) (step S860). If the determined winning number is determined to be any of 36 to 38, the determination result is YES, and whether or not any of the symbol combinations of the special symbols 01 to 03 (see FIG. 12) is aligned on the winning line L. Is determined (step S862).

  When any symbol combination of special symbols 01 to 03 (see FIG. 12) is arranged on the winning line L, the determination result in step S862 becomes YES, and the current RT state stored in the RWM is updated to RT5. (Step S864), the common process 4 in FIG. 46 is terminated, and the RT transition process in FIG. 45 is further terminated. On the other hand, if none of the special symbol combinations 01 to 03 is arranged on the winning line L, the determination result is NO, and the common process 4 in FIG. 46 and the RT transition process in FIG. 45 are finished as they are. .

  In the determination process of step S860 described above, if the determined winning number is not any of 36 to 38, the determination result is NO, and then the main control means 100 performs the role lottery process in step S18 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the determined winning number is an accessory winning number 1 (step S866). If the winning combination winning number 1 is not determined, the determination result in step S866 is NO, and the common process 4 in FIG. 46 and the RT transition process in FIG. 45 are finished as they are.

  Also, in the determination process of step S866, if the winning combination winning number 1 is determined, the determination result is YES, and then the main control means 100 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to BB01 is aligned on the winning line L. Is determined (step S868). When the symbol combination corresponding to BB01 is prepared on the winning line L, the determination result is YES, and the current RT state stored in the RWM is updated to RT6 (step S870). In the process of step S870, control for turning on the BB signal output to the outside via the external concentrated terminal board 84 shown in FIG. 3 may be performed.

  When the symbol combination corresponding to BB01 is not prepared on the winning line L in the determination process in step S868, the determination result is NO and the current RT state stored in the RWM is updated to RT5 (step S872). . When the processing in step S870 or S872 is completed, the state of the push order flag stored in the RWM is updated to OFF (step S874), and then the common processing 4 in FIG. 46 and the RT transition processing in FIG. 45 are finished. To do.

  As described above, the RT transition control shown in FIG. 13 and the main mode transition control shown in FIG. 14 are realized by performing the processes of FIGS. In this embodiment, in order to lower the payout rate at RT5 (inside the bonus), when the process proceeds to RT5 (step S868, YES), the push order flag is turned off (step S874), but RT5 It is also possible to maintain the on state of the push order flag even after shifting to, and turn off the state of the push order flag when the bonus game is started. Further, as in this embodiment, when the process proceeds to RT5 (step S868, YES), the push order flag is turned off, but a separate counter is provided, and when the process proceeds to RT5, the counter is set, and this counter Until the value becomes 0, even if the push order flag is off, the push order may be notified.

<Description of unrecoverable error handling>
Next, the contents of non-recoverable error processing executed by the main control means 100 when a non-recoverable error (power failure recovery error, set value error, random number error) is detected among the various errors shown in FIG. Will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the main control means 100 detects an unrecoverable error, it first prohibits the start of a timer interrupt process described later (step S870). As a result, the timer interrupt process is not executed even when the timer interrupt period (2.235 ms) comes, so that various data stored in the RWM is not updated or input / output, and erroneous information is transferred to the sub-control means 200 or the external You can avoid being sent to the hall computer.

  Next, the main control means 100 turns off all the output ports in order from the output port 0. That is, first, 00H (all bits are “0”) is output from the output terminals D0 to D7 of the output port 0 (step S872). Then, the address of the next output port (output port 1) is set (the address indicating the output port is incremented by “1”) (step S874), and it is determined whether 00H is output from all the output ports (step S874). S876). If it is determined that 00H is not output from all output ports (NO), the process returns to step S872 to output 00H from the output ports D0 to D7 of the output port specified by the address set in step S874. .

  As described above, by repeatedly executing steps S872 to S876 and turning off all the output ports 0 to 6, the active signal output before the non-recoverable error processing is executed is turned off. It becomes. As a result, it is possible to prevent LED deterioration, stepping motor burn-in, so-called swallowing of medals, and the like.

  For example, if an unrecoverable error occurs in a situation where a blocker signal is being output, the blocker 45 will continue to be in an on state (a state where a medal flow path is formed) unless the process is executed. On the other hand, the medal detection process executed in the timer interruption process is not performed by the process in step S870, and the medal is swallowed.

  Next, the main control means 100 sets data specifying a digit for displaying the lower digit of the error code in the H register of the CPU (step S878). Specifically, 08H (00001000B) is stored in the H register. Here, the value stored in the H register is the value of the LED display request flag (see FIG. 23), and the value (00001000B) is a display request for the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display 28). It shows that there is.

  Next, the main control means 100 sets data specifying a digit for displaying the upper digits of the error code in the D register of the CPU (step S880). Specifically, 04H (00000100B) is stored in the D register. The value stored in the D register is also the value of the LED display request flag (see FIG. 23). The value (00000100B) indicates that there is a display request for the digit 3 (the upper digit of the acquired number display 28). ing. In step S880, data 79H (01111001B) is set in the E register of the CPU. This data is segment data for the upper digits of the acquired number display 28, and the display mode is “E” (see FIG. 18).

  It should be noted that the segment data for the lower digit of the acquired number display unit 28 indicates that the non-recoverable error detected when a non-recoverable error is detected (that is, before the non-recoverable error processing of FIG. 47 is performed). The segment data indicating the display mode of the lower digit of the error code corresponding to is set in the L register. That is, for example, when a power failure recovery error is detected, 06H (00000110B) is set in the L register before the non-recoverable error processing of FIG. 47 is performed. The display mode based on the segment data is “1” (see FIG. 18).

  If a set value error is detected, 5BH (01011011B) is set in the L register before the non-recoverable error process of FIG. 47 is performed. The display mode by this segment data is “2”. Further, when a random error is detected, 4FH (01001111B) is set in the L register before the non-recoverable error processing of FIG. 47 is performed. The display mode by this segment data is “3”.

  Next, the main control means 100 turns off the LED digit (step S882). That is, it is a process of outputting (00000000B) to the address indicating the output port 0. Therefore, when the process of step S882 is executed, the outputs for digits 1 to 5 are “0”, and all the 7-segment indicators are turned off. Thereby, the flicker of LED can be prevented. Then, the main control means 110 performs an error display output process for outputting the value of the L register to the address indicating the output port 1 (step S884). The value of the L register is the value of the segment data indicating the display mode of the lower digits of the acquired number display 28, but is not displayed at this point because all the digits are off.

  Next, the main control means 100 turns on the LED digit (step S886). That is, the address indicating the output port 0 is the value of the H register (08H: 00001000B), and this value is output to turn on the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display 28). Then, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the display weight has ended (step S888). Here, the display weight is a process of subtracting “−1” from the value of the B register and determining whether or not the value of the B register becomes “0”.

  In the present embodiment, at the start of the processing in step S888, FFH (decimal “255”) ”is set in the B register, and the internal system clock is set to 16 MHz, which is approximately“ 1 / internal system clock (16 MHz) ”. × 256 × 8 (instruction) + α (other instruction) ≈The value of the B register is set to be “255” → “0” in a time of 0.128 milliseconds.

  When the value of the B register becomes “0”, the determination result of step S888 becomes YES, and the main control means 100 switches the value of the DE register and the value of the HL register to change the lower digit of the acquired number display 28. The display is switched to the display of the upper digit (or the display of the lower digit when the upper digit is displayed) (step S890). Then, the process returns to step S882, and the processes of steps S882 to S890 are repeatedly executed.

  Thus, by repeatedly executing a series of program processes, the lower digit display and the upper digit display can be performed alternately. The switching period of the upper digit / lower digit is about 0.128 milliseconds. Therefore, after the upper digit is lit for 0.128 milliseconds, the process of lighting the lower digit for 0.128 milliseconds is repeated.

  For example, when displaying the error code “E1” on the acquired number display 28, “E” is displayed for about 0.128 ms in the upper digit (digit 3) (while the lower digit (digit 4) is turned off). , “1” is displayed in digit 4 for about 0.128 ms (during this time, the upper digit (digit 3) is turned off). Also, the upper digit / lower digit switching cycle is earlier than the timer interrupt cycle (2.235 ms), and the luminance at the time of error display is increased, so that the attendant at the game hall is more likely to notice the occurrence of the error.

  As described above, even when an error occurs during a period when the timer interrupt process is not executed, the error display by the LED can be appropriately performed by the arithmetic process using the register and the hardware configuration. .

<Explanation of timer interrupt processing>
In addition to the game progress main process shown in FIG. 27, there is a timer interrupt process executed at predetermined intervals as an important process for controlling the game in the main control means 100. This timer interruption process is repeatedly executed at a period of about 2.235 milliseconds, detection of an operation for each switch of the operation means 300 shown in FIG. 3, transmission of a control command to the sub-control means 200, stepping motor 42L, Processing such as generation and output of control signals for performing drive control of 42C and 42R, updating of random number values and various counter values used as timers is performed. The contents of the above-described timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the interrupt request signal (generation period: about 2.235 milliseconds) is output from the timer count means provided in the chip, the main control means 100 starts the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. First, the main control means 100 performs an initial process of a timer interrupt process to be executed (step S900). For example, the data set in the CPU register is stored in the stack area of the RWM, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that a new timer interrupt process is not started during the timer interrupt process to be performed.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a power-off (a power supply voltage has fallen below a predetermined value) is detected based on a power-off detection signal input to the input port (step S902). It is assumed that this power-off detection signal is output from a power monitoring circuit provided on the main control board. If the main control unit 100 detects a power interruption, the determination result in step S902 is YES, and a power interruption process performed at the time of power interruption is performed (step S904). In this power-off process, the value of the power-off process completed flag indicating that the power-off process has been performed is set to “1”, the RWM checksum is calculated, and the result is stored in the nonvolatile memory. Further, after the values of the flags in the RWM are stored in the nonvolatile memory together with the values of the CPU registers and the stack pointer, access to the RWM is prohibited, and a reset signal input from the outside is waited.

  On the other hand, if the power failure is not detected in the determination process in step S902, the determination result is NO, and the main control unit 100 updates the values of various control counters that are referred to when performing various controls. (Step S906), and the count value of a timer used for general purposes to measure the predetermined time is updated (Step S908). Then, an LED display control process for updating the display contents of the credit amount display 27 and the acquired number display 28 is performed (step S910). Here, the detailed content of the LED display control process will be described later.

  Next, the main control means 100 reads various external signals input to the input port, stores them at predetermined addresses of the RWM (step S912), and performs a built-in random number check process (step S914). In the present embodiment, a random number error flag that is turned on when an error occurs in the random number generated by the random number generation unit in the main control unit 100 is provided, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on. For example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random number for the lottery is detected (for example, when the random number update is slow), the random number error flag is turned on. More specifically, the system clock SCLK (12 MHz) is supplied to the CPU, and the random number generation clock RCK (9 MHz) is supplied to the random number generation means, and when “RCK <SCLK / 2” is satisfied. The random error flag is turned on.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not a random number error has occurred (whether or not the random number error flag is on) (step S916), and when determining that a random number error has occurred (YES) The unrecoverable error processing shown in FIG. 47 is executed (step S918). At this time, the error code displayed on the acquired number display 28 is “E3”. Thus, when the non-recoverable error processing shown in FIG. 47 is executed in the timer interrupt processing, even when the reel is rotating, the rotating reel is stopped and an error code is displayed on the acquired number display 28. Will be displayed.

  If the main control means 100 determines that no random number error has occurred (NO) in the determination process of step S916, the stepping motors 42L, 42C, A reel drive management process is executed for each of 42R (step S920). When the reel drive management process is performed for all the stepping motors (step S922, YES), the main control means 100 internally displays the display data of various displays, the control signals for the stepping motors 42L, 42C, 42R, and the like. From the output port (step S924).

  Next, the main control unit 100 transmits the control command stored first among the control commands stored in the ring buffer set in the RWM to the sub-control unit 200 (step S926).

  Next, the main control means 100 performs an output process of various signals (IN signal, OUT signal, BB signal, abnormality occurrence signal, start signal, AT signal, etc.) output to the outside via the external concentration terminal board 84 (step S928). ), And updates the value of the random number used for the role lottery (step S930). Further, the main control means 100 performs a return process for restoring the values of the registers and various flags stored in the predetermined addresses of the RWM by the initial process of step S900 (step S932), and the timer interrupt of FIG. End the process.

  In the timer interrupt process described above, the non-recoverable error process is executed when a random error is detected. However, the non-recoverable error process is executed when another error is detected. Good. If a recoverable error (see FIG. 17) is detected during the game, an error code is not immediately displayed on the acquired number display 28, but the acquired number display 28 is displayed after the game ends (for example, after all reels are stopped). An error code may be displayed on the screen.

<Description of LED display control processing>
Next, the details of the LED display control process executed in step S910 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 48 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, the main control means 100 turns off the output ports 0 and 1 (step S950). Here, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the output port 0 outputs the LED digit signals 1 to 5, and the output port 1 outputs the LED segment signals a to p. From these output ports, 00000000B Is output once to prevent display of all digits. As a result, when switching the digit to be displayed, it is possible to prevent different LEDs from being turned on and viewed at the same time (to be displayed by being covered) (afterimage prevention).

  Next, the main control means 100 updates the value of the LED display counter stored in the RWM (step S952). That is, the value of the LED display counter stored at the address F016 of the RWM shown in FIG. 23 is set in the A register, and the ON (“1”) value is shifted from the current bit to the bit one digit lower. The updated value is stored in the RWM address F016 and set in the B register. Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not the value of the LED display counter is “0” (step S954). When it is determined that the value of the LED display counter after the update in step S952 is “0” (YES), the value of the LED display counter is initialized (step S956). That is, the value of the LED display counter is set to 00010000B, stored in the RWM address F016, and set in the B register.

  As a result, when 00000001B is updated to 00000000B in the process of step S952, “0” is determined in step S954, and updated to 00010000B in step S956. Therefore, it is updated from 00000001B to 00010000B within one interrupt process.

  Next, the main control means 100 sets the confirmation of the display request for the digit segments a to g to be displayed in the current timer interrupt process (step S958). If it is determined in step S954 that the value of the LED display counter is not “0” (NO), the process proceeds to step S958 without performing step S956. In the process of step S958, first, the value of the LED display request flag stored in the RWM address F017 is stored in the A register. As shown in FIG. 23, the value of the LED display request flag is such that the bit corresponding to the digit with the display request is on (“1”) and the bit corresponding to the digit without the display request is off (“0”). ing.

Next, the main control means 100 performs an AND operation (logical product) on the value of the LED display counter (value of the B register) and the value of the LED display request flag (value of the A register).
For example,
LED display counter value: 00001000
LED display request flag value: 00001111
After AND operation: 00001000
It becomes.
Or, for example,
LED display counter value: 00010000
LED display request flag value: 00001111
After AND operation: 00000000
It becomes.
When the result of the AND operation is “0”, the zero flag is “1”.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether there is an LED display request (step S960). Here, as a result of performing the process of step S958, when the zero flag is “1”, it is determined that there is no display request, and when it is not “1”, it is determined that there is a display request.

(1) When there is a display request (1-1) Setting value display control When determining that there is a display request in the determination processing of step S960, the main control means 100 acquires setting value data (step S962). That is, the current set value (any one of 1 to 6) stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM is read and stored in the A register. Then, the main control means 100 determines whether or not there is a setting value display request (step S964). That is, it is determined whether the bit D4 (corresponding to the digit 5) is “1” (00010000B) as a result of the AND operation between the value of the LED display counter and the value of the LED display request flag.

  When the main control means 100 determines that the value of the bit D4 is “1” (there is a set value display request), the determination result in step S964 is YES, and the LED segment table (FIG. 18) is displayed to display the set value. (See) offset value is generated (step S978). Specifically, an AND operation (logical product) of the value of the A register and 00001111B is performed, and only the lower 4 bits of the value of the A register are validated. That is, the value of the lower 4 bits of the value of the A register becomes the offset value. In this case, the set value is set in the A register by the process of step S962.

  Next, the main control means 100 sets the head address of the LED segment table in the HL register (step S980). Here, when the LED segment table A shown in FIG. 18A is used, 1211H is set as the head address. When the LED segment table B shown in FIG. 18B is used, when the push order number, the number of credits or the number of payouts is displayed, the first table start address 1211H is set and an error code is displayed. When doing so, the start address 1311H of the second table is set.

  Next, the main control means 100 acquires the output data of the segments ag (step S982). Here, the segment data used for display is acquired by adding the value of the A register (offset value) to the address of the LED segment table (adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register), and the acquired segment data is determined in advance. Stored in a register (for example, H register). For example, when the value of the A register is 00000000B, since the offset value is “0”, the segment data (00111111B) stored in the ROM address 1211H is acquired and stored in the H register. As a result, the display mode of the 7-segment display is “0”. When the A register value is, for example, 00000100B (offset value is “4”), the segment data (01100110B) stored in the ROM address 1215H is acquired and stored in the H register. As a result, the display mode of the 7-segment display is “4”.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not there is a display request for the segment p (step S984. Specifically, the game medal management flag (see FIG. 23) stored in the address F01B of the RWM). The value is stored in the A register, and an AND operation between the value of the A register storing the value of the game medal management flag and the value of the B register storing the value of the LED display counter is executed. As a result, when it is “0”, it is determined that there is no display request for the segment p, and when it is not “0”, it is determined that there is a display request for the segment p.

For example,
A register value: 00001101
B register value: 00001000
After AND operation: 00001000 (A register)
And there is a display request.
For example, the value of the A register: 00000101
B register value: 00001000
After AND operation: 00000000 (A register)
Thus, there is no display request.

  Here, since there is a setting value display request (step S964, YES), the value of the B register is 00010000B, so that the value of the bit D4 of the value of the A register (game medal management flag) is “1”. For example, the determination result in step S984 is YES, and if the value of the bit D4 is “0”, the determination result in step S984 is NO.

  When the main control means 100 determines that there is a display request for the segment p (YES) in the determination process of step S984, the output data of the segment p is set (step S986). Specifically, the bit D7 (most significant bit) of the H register (the output data of the segments a to g set in the process of step S982) is set to “1”. Then, the main control means 100 outputs LED display data (step S988). Specifically, the value of the A register (the value of the LED display counter and the AND operation result of the LED display request flag) is written to the output port 0 address, and the H register value (digit 5 display data) is output to the output port 1 address. Write to. Thereby, each segment of the set value display 81 and the settlement display LED 22 are turned on according to the display data.

  On the other hand, if the determination result of step S984 is NO, the process proceeds to step S988 without setting the bit D7 of the H register to “1”. As a result, the settlement display LED 22 is not lit, and each segment of the set value display 81 is lit according to the data output from the output port 1.

(1-2) Acquisition Number Display Control When the main control means 100 determines that the value of the bit D4 is not “1” (NO) in the determination process of step S964, the acquired number display data is next obtained from the address F018 of the RWM. It is read and stored in the A register (step S966). Here, the acquired number display data (8 bits) stored in the address F018 is stored by the process of step S632 in FIG. 42, and the upper 4 bits are the upper digit (digit 3) of the acquired number display 28. ) Indicates an offset value (see FIG. 18A) for specifying a display mode to be displayed, and lower 4 bits indicate an offset value for specifying a display mode to be displayed in the lower digit (digit 4) of the acquired number display 28. It shall be.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not there is a display request for the lower digit (digit 4) of the acquired number display 28 (step S968). That is, when the D3 bit (digit 4) is “1” (00001000B) in the result of the AND operation of the LED display counter value and the LED display request flag value performed in the process of step S958. ) Determines that there is a display request (YES), and otherwise determines that there is no display request (NO).

  When it is determined that there is a display request for the lower digit of the acquired number display 28 (step S968, YES), the process proceeds to the above-described step S978, and an offset value for designating segment data to be displayed is generated. That is, among the values of the A register (acquired number display data acquired in step S966), the upper 4 bits are set to “0” and the lower 4 bits are maintained. As a result, the acquired number display data acquired in step S966 becomes a value indicating only the offset value for the lower digit.

  On the other hand, when the main control means 100 determines that the D3 bit (digit 4) is not “1” (NO) in the determination processing of step S968, the upper digit (digit) of the acquired number display 28 is next. It is determined whether there is a display request of 3) (step S970). That is, when the D2 bit (digit 3) is “1” (00000100B) in the result of the AND operation of the LED display counter value and the LED display request flag value performed in the process of step S958. ) Determines that there is a display request (YES), and otherwise determines that there is no display request (NO).

  If the main control means 100 determines in the determination process of step S970 that there is a display request for the upper digits of the acquired number display 28 (YES), the acquired number display data acquired from the RWM address F018 is then used. Then, the display data of the upper digit of the acquired number display unit 28 is corrected (step S976). Specifically, the value of the upper 4 bits and the value of the lower 4 bits of the value of the A register (acquired number display data acquired in step S966) are exchanged. Then, the process proceeds to step S978, and the value of the upper 4 bits of the value of the A register is set to “0”, whereby the value indicating only the offset value for the upper digit can be obtained.

  In this way, when the offset value for the lower digit or the offset value for the upper digit of the acquired number display device 28 is generated by the process of step S978, the main control means 100 moves to step S980, The value of the head address of the LED segment table in the ROM is set in a predetermined register (for example, HL register). Then, the process proceeds to step S982, where the value of the A register (offset value) and the value of the start address are added, and the segment data to be displayed in the digit (digit 3 or 4) for which display is requested is obtained from the LED segment table. And stored in a predetermined register (for example, H register).

  Thereafter, the processing of steps S984 to S988 is performed, and the bit D7 of the H register is appropriately set to “1”, and the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display 28 and the replay display LED 23) or the digit 3 (the acquired number display 28) The display control of the upper digit and the displayable display LED 24) is performed. Here, when there is a request for display of the upper digit of the acquired number display 28, the value of the A register (the AND operation result of the LED display counter value and the LED display request flag) becomes 00000100B, so the determination in step S984 is made. The processing is performed based on the value of bit D2 (blocker state) of the game medal management flag (address F01B) shown in FIG. Further, when there is a display request for the lower digit of the acquired number display 28, the value of the A register becomes 00001000B. Therefore, the determination process in step S984 is performed by the bit D3 (re-game display LED) of the game medal management flag. It will be done based on the value.

<Modification of Display Control for Acquired Number Display 28>
(A) In the above description, in the 8-bit acquired number display data stored in the RWM address F018, the upper 4 bits indicate the offset value of the upper digits of the acquired number display 28, and the lower 4 bits are the lower digits. The offset value was shown. On the other hand, for example, a value obtained by multiplying the offset value of the upper digit by a predetermined constant (for example, “16” in decimal) and adding the offset value of the lower digit to the operation result is obtained number display data. Stored in the address F018, if the determination result in step S968 is YES, instead of the processing in step S978, the acquired acquired number display data is divided by the predetermined constant described above, and the remainder The value of may be used as the offset value of the lower digit.

  Specifically, the acquired number display data can be (higher digit offset value) × (predetermined constant “16”) + (lower digit offset value) at address F018. At this time, since the address F018 can store information of 1-byte data (decimal numbers “0” to “255”), the lower digit offset value is set to “0” to less than a predetermined constant “16”. It can be “15”, and the offset value of the upper digit can be “0” to “15”. In this way, the lower digit offset value range and the upper digit offset value range can be set as appropriate within the range of 1-byte data and in accordance with a predetermined constant value.

  In this case, if the determination result in step S970 is YES, the upper 4 bits of data and the lower 4 bits of data are replaced (step S976), and the lower 4 bits of data after the replacement (that is, Instead of using the original upper 4 bits of data) as the offset value (step S978), the acquired acquired number display data may be divided by the predetermined constant described above and the quotient value may be used as the upper digit offset value.

(A) In the process of step S635 of the push order display process shown in FIG. 42, an 8-bit offset value corresponding to the display mode of the push order number (the upper 4 bits are the upper digits and the lower 4 bits are the lower digits offset values) Is stored in a dedicated address provided separately in the RWM instead of being stored in the RWM address F018, the display data of the push order number is read from the dedicated address when the push order number is displayed. Become. In this case, for example, in the process of step S966, it is determined whether or not the push order number should be displayed, and when it is determined that the push order number should be displayed, the display data of the push order number is read from the dedicated address described above. If it is determined that the push order number should not be displayed, the acquired number display data may be acquired from the address F018 of the RWM.

  For example, when the processing of step S966 is performed, if the above-described push order flag is off and all reels are stopped, the acquired number display data is acquired from the address F018. The offset value of the push order number may be acquired from the dedicated address.

  As another method, first, when any push order number is stored in the dedicated address in which the offset value of the push order number is stored, no data is stored in the address F018 of the RWM. No state (for example, data value is 00H). On the other hand, when any display data is stored in the RWM address F018, no push order number is stored in the dedicated address (for example, the data value is 00H). To do. In other words, the period in which data is stored in the dedicated address described above and the period in which data is stored in the address F018 are not overlapped. When the acquired number display 28 is displayed, the display based on the data obtained by adding the data stored in the dedicated address and the data stored in the address F018 is performed.

  That is, in this case, since there is no state in which data is stored in both the dedicated address and the address F018, even if the data stored in each address is added, the acquired number display 28 displays Either the push order number or the payout number will be displayed. When such a method is employed, it is not necessary to determine whether the offset value to be displayed on the acquired number display device 28 is acquired from the dedicated address or the address F018.

  Also, when the push order number is displayed on the acquired number display 28 based on the data stored in the RWM address F01A, the data stored in the RWM address F01A is read as an offset value, and the segment is read from the LED segment table. Data may be acquired, or data obtained by adding a specific value to the data stored at the address F01A of the RWM may be read as an offset value, and segment data may be acquired from the LED segment table.

(C) In the LED display control process of FIG. 49, the LED display request flag (see address F017 of FIG. 23) is referred to by the process of step S958, and the presence / absence of a display request is determined for each digit in step S960. When it is necessary to make the acquired number display 28 non-displayed, the following processing is performed, so that the processing in steps S958 and S960 (and the LED display request flag itself) can be omitted. That is,
(A) When predetermined data (for example, “FFH”) is stored in the RWM address (F018 in this embodiment) for acquiring segment data for lighting the acquired number display 28. Do not perform lighting control without obtaining data from LED segment data, or
(B) When a pattern indicating non-lighting (non-lighting pattern data) is defined in the LED segment data and the acquired number display 28 is not displayed, an offset value (LED segment) for designating the non-lighting pattern data In the table A, the offset value F (H)) is stored in the RWM address for acquiring the segment data for lighting the acquired number display 28. Thereby, lighting control based on the non-lighting pattern data is performed, and as a result, the corresponding digit is not lighted (not lighted).

(D) In the LED display control process shown in FIG. 49, even if the acquired number display data is the data indicating no display (FFH), the processes in steps S976 to S982 are performed, and all the LED segment data in the ROM is calculated. Segment data indicating that the segment has been turned off (see FIG. 18) has been acquired. Instead of performing such processing, for example, when the acquired number display data acquired in step S966 (or the 8-bit offset value indicating the display mode of the push order number described above) indicates no display. When the determination result in step S968 or S970 is YES, the process may immediately proceed to step S982 to set 00H data in the H register. As a display mode indicating that the acquired number display 28 is not displayed, segment data (3FH: 00111111B) indicating “0” is stored in the H register instead of turning off all the segments of the 7-segment display. May be set.

(1-3) Storage Number Display Control When the determination results in steps S968 and S970 in FIG. 49 are both NO, the main control means 100 reads the stored number display data from the address F019 of the RWM, and registers A. (Step S972). Here, the stored number display data (8 bits) stored in the address F019 is data representing the current stored number (up to 50) in binary-coded decimal (BCD). Here, in the LED segment table shown in FIG. 18 (a), the value of the upper 4 bits of the stored number display data corresponds to the offset value of the display mode representing the tens digit of the stored number, and the lower 4 bits. This value corresponds to the offset value of the display mode representing the number of the first place of the stored number.

  Next, the main control means 100 determines whether or not there is a display request for the lower digit (digit 2) of the credit amount display 27 (step S974). That is, when the D1 bit (digit 2) is “1” (00000010B) in the result of the AND operation between the value of the LED display counter and the value of the LED display request flag performed in step S958. ) Determines that there is a display request (YES), and otherwise determines that there is no display request (NO).

  When it is determined that there is a display request for the lower digit of the credit amount display 27 (step S974, YES), the process proceeds to the above-described step S978, and an offset value for designating segment data to be displayed is generated. That is, among the values of the A register (stored number display data acquired in step S972), the upper 4 bits are set to “0”, and the lower 4 bits are maintained. Thereby, it becomes a value which shows only the offset value for the lower digits among the stored number display data acquired at Step S972.

  On the other hand, when the main control means 100 determines that the D1 bit (digit 2) is not “1” (NO) in the determination process of step S974, the process proceeds to step S976 and is acquired from the address F019 of the RWM. The stored number display data is corrected to the upper digit display data of the credit number display unit 27. Specifically, the value of the upper 4 bits and the value of the lower 4 bits of the value of the A register (stored number display data acquired in step S972) are exchanged. Then, the process proceeds to step S978, and the value of the upper 4 bits of the value of the A register is set to “0”, whereby the value indicating only the offset value for the upper digit can be obtained.

  The offset value is obtained by multiplying the offset value of the upper digit by a predetermined constant (for example, “16” in decimal number), for example, in the same manner as described in the acquisition number display unit 28 described above. When the value obtained by adding the offset value of the lower digit is stored as the stored number display data at the address F019, the acquired stored number display data is divided by the predetermined constant described above, and the remaining value is subtracted. It may be a digit offset value. Specifically, the stored number display data can be (high-order offset value) × (predetermined constant “16”) + (low-order offset value) at the address F019.

  At this time, since the address F019 can store information of 1-byte data (decimal numbers “0” to “255”), the lower digit offset value is set to “0” to less than a predetermined constant “16”. It can be “15”, and the offset value of the upper digit can be “0” to “15”. In this way, the lower digit offset value range and the upper digit offset value range can be set as appropriate within the range of 1-byte data and in accordance with a predetermined constant value. In this case, the stored number display data may be divided by the predetermined constant described above, and the quotient value may be used as the upper digit offset value and the remainder value may be used as the lower digit offset value.

  When the offset value for the lower digits or the offset value for the upper digits of the credit number display unit 27 is generated by the process of step S978, the main control means 100 moves to step S980 and stores in the ROM. The value of the start address of the LED segment table is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S982, where the value of the A register (offset value) and the value of the head address are added, and the segment data to be displayed in the digit (digit 1 or 2) for which display is requested is obtained from the LED segment table. And stored in the H register.

  Thereafter, the processing of steps S984 to S988 is performed, and the bit D7 of the H register is appropriately set to “1”, and the digit 2 (the lower digit of the credit number display 27) or the digit 1 (the upper digit of the credit number display 27 and the game) Display control of the start display LED 25) is performed. Here, when displaying the upper digit of the credit amount display 27, the value of the A register (the AND operation result of the LED display counter value and the LED display request flag) is 00000001B. The processing is performed based on the value of bit D0 (start switch acceptance state) of the game medal management flag (address F01B) shown in FIG.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when displaying each 7-segment display of digits 1 to 5, it is sufficient if there is 7-digit data of D0 to D6 bits corresponding to segments a to g. Since data is handled in units of 1 byte (8 bits), the bit D7 (the most significant bit) is left, so the bit D7 is effectively used and used for lighting control of each display LED.

  As described above, in this embodiment, one digit is turned on by one timer interrupt process. That is, for each interrupt (every 2.235 ms), the display to be lit is switched in the order of digit 5 → digit 4 →... → digit 1 → digit 5 →. Therefore, for example, when the upper digit of the credit number display 27 which is the digit 1 is lit, the next lighting is after 5 interrupts (after 11.18 milliseconds).

  Here, the brightness of the LED is determined by the time interval from lighting to the next lighting. In this embodiment, one digit is controlled to light up once every 11.18 milliseconds as described above, but when displaying an error code of an unrecoverable error, as described above. 49. Since the lighting switching between the upper digit and the lower digit is repeated every 0.128 milliseconds, the lighting cycle becomes shorter than the timer interrupt cycle, and the display of the acquired number display 28 is the LED display control processing of FIG. It will look brighter than if

<Relationship between control command transmission timing and push order number display timing>
Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 50, the relationship between the transmission timing of the control command and the display timing of the push order number when the game progress main process of this embodiment is executed will be described. Hereinafter, the case where the freeze effect is executed in step S34 of FIG. 27 and the case where it is not performed will be described separately.

(A) When performing a freeze effect When the start switch 36 is operated, the result of determination in step S14 of FIG. 27 is YES, and a role lottery process is performed (step S18). The push order number is determined by the process (step S24) or the AT state process (step S26). In step S28, a freeze lottery is performed (FIG. 41, step S592 or S604). When the freeze lottery is won, freeze number 1 or 2 is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (FIG. 41, step S600 or S610). In this case, the determination result in step S30 of FIG. 27 is YES, the freeze effect (reel effect) is started in step S34, and when the freeze effect ends (step S36, YES), the push order number is acquired in step S38. The number is displayed on the number indicator 28.

  Next, the state of the push order flag is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 in step S40, and the push order number is sent to the sub-control means 200 in step S42. Thereafter, the winning / replaying winning number and the winning combination winning number are transmitted to the sub-control means 200 by the processing of steps S54 and S56. As described above, when the freeze effect is executed, the push order is notified by the acquired number display device 28 and the image display device 70 after the freeze effect is completed.

  There are the following reasons for this. In the present embodiment, there are a case where a freeze effect is performed with the winning numbers 22 to 27 and a case where a freeze effect is performed with the winning number 32. In the case of an AT game, the push order is notified when the winning numbers are 22 to 27, but the push order is not notified when the winning number is 32, since it is not necessary to notify the push order. For this reason, if the notification of the pushing order is performed in response to the operation of the start lever, when the freeze effect is performed by winning the winning numbers 22 to 27, the pushing order is notified during the freeze effect. There is a possibility that the player knows whether the current freeze production is based on the winning numbers 22-27 or the winning number 32 depending on whether or not the push order is notified. This is because there is a risk of fading.

  In the present embodiment, the winning / replay winning number and the winning combination winning number are transmitted before the reel starts to rotate so as to be transmitted to the sub-control means 200 before the reel reaches the constant speed rotation. I am doing so. In the case of the present embodiment, since the winning combination winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 200 after the freeze effect is finished, the sub-control unit 200 separately performs processing based on the freeze number command. It is desirable to start the effect during the freeze effect during the process.

(B) When the freeze effect is not executed When the start switch 36 is operated, the role lottery process is performed, and the pressing order number is determined by the non-AT state process or the AT state process according to the main mode. If the lottery is shifted to the freeze lottery (FIG. 41, step S594 or S606, NO), the freeze number 0 is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (FIG. 41, steps S598 → S600). In this case, the push order number is displayed on the acquired number display 28 without executing the freeze effect (step S30, NO → S38), and then the push order flag, push order number, winning / replay winning number and The winning item winning numbers are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control means 200.

<< Description of control processing in sub-control means >>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub control unit 200 will be described. First, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, the sub control means 200 executes the sub power on process shown in FIG.

<Description of sub power-on processing>
First, during the execution of the sub power-on process, the sub control unit 200 performs a process for prohibiting the execution of the timer interrupt process by the sub control unit 200 (step Ss10), and then calculates the RWM checksum. It is compared with the checksum calculation result of the same RWM calculated at the time of power-off and stored in the external non-volatile memory, and it is determined whether or not they match (step Ss12). If both checksum values do not match, the determination result is NO, and the sub-control unit 200 clears the stored contents of the RWM built in the sub-control unit 200 (step Ss14).

  If the checksum values in the determination process in step Ss12 match, the determination result is YES, and the sub-control unit 200 is the one in which the previous power interruption occurred during the one-command process described later. It is determined whether or not there is (step Ss16). Here, the sub-control unit 200 is configured to restart the process performed at the time of power-off when the power is turned off again when the power-off occurs during one-command processing described later. Then, a process of saving various information (data indicating the state of the CPU registers and various flags) in the external nonvolatile memory (power cutoff process) is performed.

  In addition, a power interruption process flag indicating whether or not the power interruption process has been performed at the previous power interruption is also stored in the external nonvolatile memory. Therefore, the determination process shown in step Ss16 is determined based on the on / off state of the power interruption process flag stored in the external nonvolatile memory. Here, when the power interruption processing flag is turned on, it indicates that the power interruption processing described above has been performed (that is, a power interruption has occurred during processing of one command), and when it is turned off. This indicates that the power-off process has not been performed (that is, the power-off has not occurred during one command process).

  In the determination process of step Ss16, if the power interruption has occurred during the process of one command, the determination result is YES, the execution of the timer interrupt process in the sub-control means 200 is permitted in step Ss10 (step Ss18), and the power supply Resumes the processing that was being executed when the connection was interrupted.

  When the content stored in the RWM in the sub-control means 200 is cleared by the process of step Ss14 described above, or when the determination result of step Ss16 is NO (the previous power cut did not occur during the process of one command) After clearing the value of the watchdog timer (step Ss20), the operation of the watchdog timer is started (step Ss22). This watchdog timer is for notifying that an abnormality has occurred when the time required for processing in steps Ss24 to S28 described later exceeds 16 milliseconds.

  The sub-control unit 200 permits the execution of the timer interrupt process prohibited in step Ss10 (step Ss24), and then reads the control command received from the main control unit 100 from the command buffer, and performs processing based on the control command (one command Process) (step Ss26). Then, it is determined whether or not 16 milliseconds have elapsed since the operation of the watchdog timer was started in the process of step Ss22 (step Ss28). If it is determined that 16 milliseconds has not elapsed (NO), the process proceeds to step Ss26 again, the command stored in the command buffer is read, and one command processing based on the control command is performed. Then, one command processing in step Ss26 is repeated until 16 milliseconds have elapsed, and when 16 milliseconds have elapsed, the determination result in step Ss28 is YES, and the processing returns to step Ss20.

  As described above, the sub control unit 200 performs the effect control process based on the control command transmitted from the main control unit 100 by repeatedly executing the sub-main routine process described above.

<Description of 1 command processing>
Next, the contents of one command processing in step Ss26 in FIG. 51 will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. Here, the one-command processing described below is performed from the reception of the “object winning number” command (B3 ##) shown in FIG. 25 to the reception of the “display type” command (A4 ##). Processing is shown. Further, it is assumed that the contents of the second control command included in the various control commands received before receiving the “actual item winning number” command are stored in a predetermined storage area in the RWM of the sub-control unit 200. .

  When the one-command process in step Ss26 shown in FIG. 51 is started, the sub-control unit 200 determines the type of the control command received from the main control unit 100 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 52 (step Ss100). If the received control command is an “object winning number” command, the determination result in step Ss100 is YES, and the pressing order is determined based on the pressing order number already received from the main control means 100 and the winning number. A process at the time of operating the start switch to be notified is executed (step Ss102). The contents of the start switch operation processing will be described in detail later with reference to a detailed flowchart. When the start switch operation process is completed, the one-command process in FIG. 52 is terminated, and the process proceeds to the determination process in step Ss28 in FIG.

  When the sub-control unit 200 determines in the determination process of step Ss100 that the “object winning number” command has not been received, the determination result is NO. Next, the sub-control unit 200 determines that the received command It is determined whether or not the “reel rotation start” command (9E7F, 9F7F, A07F) is received (step Ss104). When the “reel rotation start” command is received for each reel, the determination result in step Ss104 is YES, and the content of the effect being executed is switched or the content of the effect is advanced at the timing when each reel starts to rotate ( Step Ss106). Then, the one command process in FIG. 52 is terminated, and the process proceeds to the determination process in step Ss28 in FIG.

  If it is determined in step Ss104 that the sub-control unit 200 has not received the “reel rotation start” command, the determination result is NO. Next, the sub-control unit 200 determines that the received command is received for each reel. Among the “reel stop acceptance” commands (9E ##, 9F ## or A0 ##), is the “reel stop acceptance” command (first stop operation acceptance) received first after the reel starts rotating? It is determined whether or not (step Ss108). Here, in the following, the “reel stop acceptance” command received first after the reel starts rotating is the “first reel stop acceptance” command, and the second received “reel stop acceptance” command is “second reel stop”. The “reception” command and the last received “reel stop acceptance” command are referred to as “third reel stop acceptance” commands.

  If it is a “first reel stop reception” command (first stop operation reception) command, the determination result is YES, and the notification mode of the pressing order is mainly changed by the player operating the stop switch. The first stop operation reception process is executed (step Ss110). The contents of the first stop operation acceptance process will be described in detail later with reference to a detailed flowchart. When the first stop operation acceptance process is completed, the one command process of FIG. 52 is terminated, and the process proceeds to the determination process of step Ss28 of FIG.

  If the sub-control unit 200 determines that the “first reel stop acceptance” command has not been received in the determination process of step Ss108, the determination result is NO, and then the sub-control unit 200 determines that the received command is the first It is determined whether or not it is one stop, that is, a “reel rotation stop” command (987E, 9F7E or A07E) received first after each reel starts rotating (step Ss112). Here, in the following, the “reel rotation stop” command received first after the reel starts rotating is the “first reel rotation stop” command, and the second received “reel rotation stop” command is “second reel rotation”. The “stop” command and the last received “reel rotation stop” command are called “third reel rotation stop” commands.

  If the “first reel rotation stop” command is received, the determination result in step Ss112 is YES, and an effect (for example, a reel stop sound or a reel back lamp) generated when the reel is stopped in association with the reel to be stopped is used. Visual presentation or the like) is executed (step Ss114). Then, when the effect at the time of the first stop is executed, the one command process of FIG. 52 is terminated, and the process proceeds to the determination process of step Ss28 of FIG.

  If it is determined in step Ss112 that the sub-control unit 200 has not received the “first reel rotation stop” command, the determination result is NO. Next, the sub-control unit 200 determines that the received command is “ It is determined whether or not it is a “second reel stop acceptance” command (second stop operation acceptance) (step Ss116). If it is a “second reel stop reception” command (second stop operation reception), the determination result in step Ss116 is YES, and the stop switch is operated by the player. A process at the time of accepting the second stop operation for changing the aspect is executed (step Ss118). The contents of the second stop operation acceptance process will be described in detail later with reference to a detailed flowchart. When the second stop operation acceptance process is completed, the one-command process in FIG. 52 is terminated, and the process proceeds to the determination process in step Ss28 in FIG.

  If the sub-control unit 200 determines that the “second reel stop acceptance” command has not been received in the determination process of step Ss116, the determination result is NO, and then the sub-control unit 200 determines that the received command is the first It is determined whether or not it is a 2 stop, that is, “second reel rotation stop” command (step Ss120). When the “second reel rotation stop” command is received, the determination result in step Ss120 is YES, and an effect generated when the reels stop in association with the reel to be stopped (for example, a ten-pound sound or a visual using a reel back lamp). , Etc.) is executed (step Ss122). When the second stop effect is executed, the one-command process in FIG. 52 is terminated, and the process proceeds to the determination process in step Ss28 in FIG.

  If it is determined in step Ss120 that the sub-control unit 200 has not received the “second reel rotation stop” command, the determination result is NO. Next, the sub-control unit 200 determines that the received command is “ It is determined whether or not it is a “third reel stop acceptance” command (third stop operation acceptance) (step Ss124). If the command is “Receive third reel stop” (third stop operation accepted), the determination result in step Ss124 is YES, and the stop switch is operated by the player. The process at the time of accepting the third stop operation is executed (step Ss126). The contents of the third stop operation reception process will also be described in detail later with reference to a detailed flowchart. When the third stop operation acceptance process is completed, the one command process of FIG. 52 is terminated, and the process proceeds to the determination process of step Ss28 of FIG.

  If the sub-control unit 200 determines that the “third reel stop acceptance” command has not been received in the determination process of step Ss124, the determination result is NO. Next, the sub-control unit 200 determines that the received command is It is determined whether or not it is a 3 stop, that is, “3rd reel rotation stop” command (step Ss128). When the “stop third reel rotation” command is received, the determination result in step Ss128 is YES, and an effect (for example, a reel stop sound or visual recognition using a reel back lamp) generated when the reel is stopped in association with the reel to be stopped. A typical effect) is executed (step Ss130). Then, when the effect at the time of the third stop is executed, the one command process of FIG. 52 is terminated, and the process proceeds to the determination process of step Ss28 of FIG.

  If it is determined in step Ss128 that the sub-control unit 200 has not received the “stop third reel rotation” command, the determination result in step Ss128 is NO, and the sub-control unit 200 then receives the received command. Is a “display type” command (stop all reels) (step Ss132). If it is a “display type” command, the determination result in step Ss132 is YES, and the stop switch is operated by the player, so that the sub-control means 200 causes the effect lottery means 212 (see FIG. 3). An effect lottery process for determining an effect to be executed in the next game is performed (step Ss134). When the effect lottery process is finished, the one command process in FIG. 52 is terminated, and the process proceeds to the determination process in step Ss28 in FIG.

  If it is determined in step Ss132 that the sub-control unit 200 has not received the “display type” command, the determination result in step Ss132 is NO. Next, the sub-control unit 200 determines that the received command is It is determined whether or not any of the “power failure recovery error display start” command (8101H) to “medal full error display start” command (810AH) shown in FIG. 24 (step Ss136). If it is any error display start command, the determination result in step Ss136 is YES, and error notification according to the type of error received is executed (step S138).

  As an example of this error notification, a message (error message) indicating the content of the received error display command is displayed on the image display device 70, or the type of error detected from the speakers 64L and 64R is output by voice. . However, when an error display start command related to a recoverable error (see FIG. 17) is received while the push order is displayed on the image display device 70, an error message is displayed while the push order display is maintained. It is desirable to display this error message so as not to reduce the visibility of the displayed push order as much as possible. Further, when an error display start command related to a recoverable error is received while the push order is displayed on the image display device 70, error notification may be performed after all reels have stopped.

  Note that when the pressing order number is displayed when a recoverable error (for example, a door opening error) is detected, the main control unit 100 continues to display the pressing order number. On the other hand, when receiving the various error display start commands, the sub-control unit 200 performs error notification according to the error display start command received by the image display device 70. In this case, the main control means 100 displays an error code corresponding to the detected recoverable error on the acquired number display 28 after all the reels have stopped. Depending on the type of detected recoverable error, The error notification may be performed only by the image display device 70 without displaying the code on the acquired number display 28. By configuring in this way, since the player can grasp the optimum pushing order in the game because the pushing order number is displayed by the main control means 100, the player operates the stop switch in the optimum pushing order. Thus, the game can be continued and an error is notified by the sub-control means 200, so that the player and the hall clerk can grasp that an error has occurred.

  When the error notification by the process of step S138 is completed, the sub-control unit 200 ends the one command process of FIG. 52 and proceeds to the determination process of step Ss28 of FIG.

  If the sub-control unit 200 determines that no error display start command has been received in the determination process of step Ss136, the determination result of step Ss136 is NO, and then the sub-control unit 200 determines that the received command is Then, it is determined whether or not the “error return” command (8100H) shown in FIG. 24 (step Ss140). If the command is an “error return” command, the determination result in step Ss140 is YES, and if error notification has been performed by the processing in step Ss138, the error notification is terminated (step S142). When the error notification is terminated by the process of step S142, the one command process of FIG. 52 is terminated, and the process proceeds to the determination process of step Ss28 of FIG.

  It should be noted that, when the player presses the stop switch when the push order hitting game is executed by the process of steps S546 to S550 of the common process 2 shown in FIG. 39, the stop switch is correct (that is, the stop operation). It is determined whether or not the stop switch is in accordance with the pressing order in which the symbol combinations of 9 sheets are arranged). When it is determined that the answer is correct, a correct command indicating that the answer is correct is transmitted to the sub-control means 200. On the other hand, when it is determined that the answer is incorrect, an incorrect answer command indicating that the answer is incorrect is transmitted to the sub-control means. The determination timing may be performed when the stop switch is operated, or may be performed after the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is stopped (after all reels are stopped). When determining when the stop switch is operated, the correct command or the incorrect command may be transmitted after transmitting each reel stop acceptance command. In this case, the sub-control unit 200 may perform a process based on the correct answer command or the incorrect answer command, and may start an effect corresponding to the correct answer or the incorrect answer in this process, or after the correct answer command or the incorrect answer command. In processing based on each reel rotation stop command transmitted, an effect corresponding to a correct answer or an incorrect answer may be started.

  Further, when the determination is made after the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is stopped, the correct command or the incorrect command may be transmitted after transmitting each reel rotation stop command. In this case, it is desirable that the sub-control unit 200 performs a process based on the correct answer command or the incorrect answer command, and starts an effect corresponding to the correct answer or the incorrect answer in this process.

<Description of start switch operation>
Next, the contents of the start switch operation process in step Ss102 of FIG. 52 will be described.

(A) When the pushing order is not determined by the sub-control means 200 In this embodiment, the pushing order notified by the non-AT state process in step S24 or the AT state process in step S26 of the game progress main process shown in FIG. Specifically, the sub-control unit 200 may notify the push order corresponding to the received push order number. As this notification mode, a notification mode employed in a conventional slot machine can be used.

  Therefore, in this case, when the process of step Ss102 in FIG. 52 is started, the sub control unit 200 determines the state of the push order flag included in the second control command of the “push order flag” command received from the main control unit 100. It is determined whether or not it is turned on, and if the push order flag is off, the process of step Ss102 in FIG. 52 is terminated as it is, and the one-command process shown in FIG. 43 is terminated. On the other hand, when the state of the push order flag is on, the push order corresponding to the push order number included in the second control command of the “push order number” command received from the main control means 100. Then, the process of step Ss102 in FIG. 52 is terminated.

(B) When the sub-control means 200 determines the push order As described above, the benefits granted to the player by the push order (start of bonus game or replay, transition of RT state, number of medals paid out, etc.) If there is no change in the game, there will be no change in the benefits given to the player by a part of the pressing order (the order of the second and third stop operations), or medals will be paid out with the combination of symbols. Even if the payout number is less than the number of inserted medals, the sub-control means 200 may determine the pressing order to be notified when it is difficult to influence the payout. Hereinafter, the contents of the start switch operation process when the sub-control means 200 determines the pressing order to be notified will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the sub-control unit 200 starts the start switch operation process in step Ss102 shown in FIG. 52, first, the state of the push order flag included in the second control command of the “push order flag” command is turned on. It is determined whether or not (step Ss150). When the push order flag is off, the determination result is NO and the start switch operation time process shown in FIG. 53 is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the push order flag is on, the determination result in step Ss150 is YES, and then the state of the AT flag included in the second control command of the “AT flag” command is on. It is determined whether or not (step Ss152). As described above, the AT flag is a flag indicating whether or not the AT is in progress. When the flag is on, the AT is in progress. When the flag is off, the AT is not in progress. In the following description, the case where the state of the AT flag is off and the case where it is on will be described separately.

(B-1) When the AT Flag is Off If the determination result in step Ss152 shows that the AT flag is off, the determination result is NO and the sub-control unit 200 receives from the main control unit 100. It is determined whether or not the value of the chance zone game number CZCNT is 1 or more (step Ss154). When the value of CZCNT is 0, the determination result is NO, a push order navigation effect corresponding to the push order number received from the main control means 100 is executed (step Ss156), and the start switch operation time process of FIG. finish. Here, the push order navigation effect is an effect intended to notify the player of the push order, and a conventional push order navigation effect can be adopted.

  If it is determined in step Ss154 that the value of CZCNT is 1 or more, the determination result is YES, and the sub-control unit 200 is included in the second control command of the “production group number” command received from the main control unit 100. It is determined whether or not the effect group number that has been determined indicates that the winning number 2 (replay-B) was determined in the role lottery (step Ss158). Here, in order to eliminate complexity, the description “whether or not the production group number indicates that the winning number a is a winning number a (a is a natural number) in the role lottery” is simply “winning”. In other words, whether the number is a or not. Also, for example, if “winning number is a (a is a natural number)” is described, the received “production group number” indicates that winning number a was determined in the lottery. Means that.

  In the determination process of step Ss158, the effect group number included in the second control command of the “effect group number” command received from the main control means 100 is determined as the winning number 2 (replay-B) in the role lottery. (I.e., if the winning number is 2), the determination result is YES, and the sub-control means 200 performs six push orders (left to middle) for the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R. One is selected by lottery (→ right, left → right → middle, middle → left → right, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, right → middle → left) (step Ss160). Then, a push order navigation effect corresponding to the determined push order is executed (step Ss162), and the start switch operation process in FIG. 53 is terminated.

  In the determination process of step Ss158, the effect group number included in the second control command of the “effect group number” command received from the main control means 100 is determined as the winning number 2 (replay-B) in the role lottery. In other words, if the winning number is not 2, the determination result is NO, and the secondary control means 200 is included in the second control command of the received “production group number” command. It is determined whether or not the production group number that has been selected indicates that the winning number is determined to be any of 3 to 8 (that is, whether or not the winning number is any of 3 to 8). (Step Ss164). If the winning number is any one of 3 to 8, the determination result is YES, and the sub-control unit 200 presses the push number corresponding to the push order number received from the main control unit 100 among the above-described six push orders. One of the five pushing orders other than the order is determined by lottery (step Ss166).

  This is due to the same reason as Step S138 of the non-AT state processing shown in FIG. 28. The fact that the winning number is determined to be any one of 3 to 8 means that the RT state is RT1 ( This is because more opportunities for AT lottery can be obtained by staying at RT1 in the chance zone. Then, a push order navigation effect corresponding to the push order determined by the lottery is executed (step Ss168), and the start switch operation time process of FIG. 53 is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the determination process of step Ss164, if the winning number is not any of 3 to 8, the determination result is NO, and the sub-control unit 200 corresponds to the pressing order number received from the main control unit 100. The push order navigation effect is executed (step Ss170), and the start switch operation process in FIG. 53 is terminated.

(B-2) When AT Flag is On If the determination result in step Ss152 shows that the AT flag is on, the determination result is YES and the sub-control means 200 receives from the main control means 100. It is determined whether or not the winning number included in the second control command of the “production group number” command is 21 (winning-A) (step Ss172). If the winning number is 21, the determination result is YES, and it is then determined whether or not the push order number received from the main control means 100 is 9 (first right stop) (step Ss174). If the push order number received from the main control means 100 is not 9, the determination result is NO, and the push order navigation effect corresponding to the push order number received from the main control means 100 is executed (step Ss176). , The process at the time of operating the start switch in FIG. 53 is finished.

  In the determination process of step Ss174, if the received push order number is 9, the determination result is YES, the sub control means 200 sets the second stop operation to the left stop switch 37L, and the third stop operation to the middle stop switch 37C. It is determined by lottery whether the second stop operation is the middle stop switch 37C and the third stop operation is the left stop switch 37L (step Ss178). The first stop operation is the right stop switch 37R, and the second and third stop operations are the stop switches determined in step Ss178, corresponding to the pressing order (ie, right → left → middle or right → middle → left). The push order navigation effect is executed (step Ss180), and the start switch operation process in FIG. 53 is terminated.

  If the winning number received from the main control means 100 is not 21 in the determination process of step Ss172 described above, the sub-control means 200 next determines whether or not the received winning number is any of 28-30. Judgment is made (step Ss182). If the received winning number is 28 to 30, the determination result is YES, and a 6-option navigation lottery similar to step S556 of the common process 2 shown in FIG. 39 is executed (step Ss184). In other words, if the player knows the stop switch that should be operated for the first stop, the player can prepare the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning numbers, and the lottery determines whether or not to notify the pressing order of the first to third stop operations. Determined by.

  Then, the sub-control unit 200 determines whether or not the 6-choice navigation lottery of step Ss184 has been won (step Ss186). If not, the determination result is NO and the push corresponding to the received push order number is received. A forward navigation effect is executed (step Ss188). When the received winning number is not any of 28 to 30 in the determination process in step Ss182, the determination result is NO, and the process proceeds to step Ss188 without performing steps Ss184 and Ss186.

  In the determination process of step Ss186, if the 6-choice navigation lottery performed in step Ss184 is won, the determination result is YES, and the stop switch that should be operated for the first stop that results in the combination of the symbols corresponding to the received winning numbers With respect to the remaining two stop switches, it is determined by lottery which stop switch to perform the second and third stop operations (step Ss190). Then, in the order of pressing in which the stop switch that should be operated for the first stop, in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the received winning numbers are aligned, and the second and third stop switches that should be operated for stop determined in step Ss190 are combined. The corresponding push order navigation effect is executed (step Ss192), and the start switch operation process in FIG. 53 is terminated.

<Explanation of stop operation acceptance process>
Next, the contents of the first to third stop operation acceptance processing in steps Ss110, Ss118, and Ss126 of FIG. 52 will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b). Here, FIG. 54A shows a flowchart of the first and second stop operation reception processing, and FIG. 54B shows a flowchart of the third stop operation reception processing.

(A) First and second stop operation acceptance processing When the sub-control means 200 starts the process of step Ss110 or Ss118 of FIG. 52, the push-sequence navigation effect is being executed in the flowchart of FIG. 54 (a). Is determined (step Ss200). In the start switch operation processing of step Ss102 shown in FIG. 52, when the push order navigation effect is not executed, the determination result is NO, and the stop operation reception processing of FIG. On the other hand, when the push order navigation effect is being executed, the determination result is YES, and it is determined whether the stop switch operated by the player matches the push order indicated by the push order navigation effect. (Step Ss202).

  Then, when the stop switch operated by the player conforms to the push order indicated by the push order navigation effect, the determination result is YES, and the stop switch that performs the next stop operation of the push order navigation effect that is being executed is displayed. The effect is changed to the suggestion (step Ss204). That is, when the process of step Ss204 is performed when the first stop operation is received, a stop switch that performs the second stop operation is suggested, and when the process of step Ss204 is performed when the second stop operation is received, the third stop operation is performed. Suggest a stop switch to do. Then, when the process of step Ss204 is performed, the stop operation reception process of FIG.

  In the determination process of step Ss202, when the stop switch operated by the player does not conform to the pressing order indicated by the push order navigation effect, the determination result is NO and the currently executed push order navigation effect ends ( Step Ss206) After performing the push order incorrect answer effect (step Ss208), the stop operation acceptance processing in FIG. 54A is terminated.

(B) Third stop operation acceptance process When the sub-control means 200 starts the process of step Ss126 of FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the push order navigation effect is being executed in the flowchart of FIG. 54 (b). (Step Ss220). In the start switch operation time process of step Ss102 shown in FIG. 52, if the push order navigation effect is not executed, the determination result is NO, and the stop operation reception time process of FIG. On the other hand, when the push order navigation effect is being executed, the determination result is YES, the currently executed push order navigation effect is terminated (step Ss222), and the effect at the correct push order is performed (step Ss222). Ss224), the stop operation acceptance process in FIG. 54B is terminated.

  54 (a) and 54 (b), when the operation process at the time of accepting the stop operation is performed, for example, in the start switch operation process in step Ss102 shown in FIG. 52, as shown in FIGS. It is assumed that a push order navigation effect indicating a push order of middle → right → left is executed. At this time, when the middle stop switch 37C is operated for the first stop, the determination results in steps Ss200 and s202 in FIG. 54A are both YES, and in step Ss204, the stop switch to be operated for the second stop is the right stop switch. An effect indicating that it is 37R is performed (see FIGS. 54C and 54A).

  Next, when the second stop operation of the right stop switch 37R is performed, in the second stop operation reception process in step Ss118 of FIG. 52, in the same manner as in the first stop operation, in steps Ss200 and s202 of FIG. Both the determination results are YES, and in step Ss204, an effect indicating that the stop switch to be third stopped is the left stop switch 37L (see FIGS. 54C and 54C). Finally, when the third stop operation is performed on the left stop switch 37L, the determination result in step Ss220 in FIG. 54B is YES in the third stop operation acceptance processing in step Ss126 in FIG. 52, and in step Ss222. The push order navigation effect ends, and the effect at the correct push order is executed in step Ss224 (see FIGS. 54C and 54D).

  On the other hand, when the left stop switch 37L is operated as the second stop operation, the determination result in step Ss202 of FIG. 54A is NO in the second stop operation reception process of step Ss118 of FIG. Thus, the process of step Ss206 is performed, and the push order navigation effect ends (see FIGS. 54 (c) and 54). Then, the push order incorrect answer effect is performed in the process of step Ss208 (see FIGS. 54C and 54F). In this case, the determination result in step Ss220 in FIG. 54C is NO in the third stop operation acceptance process in step Ss126 in FIG. 52, so that the effect in the correct answer in step Ss224 is not executed.

  In the example of FIG. 54 (c), a case where the player misses the pressing order during the second stop operation is shown. At this time, the display corresponding to the pressing order number displayed on the acquired number display 28 is as follows. The display may be kept as it is, or the display may be deleted. Note that the timing of erasing the display on the acquired number display 28 may be before the end of the push order navigation effect in step Ss206 shown in FIG. It is desirable to be after the end of production. When comprised in this way, when the display according to the pushing order number by the main control means 100 is not made, the state where the pushing order navigation effect by the sub-control means 200 is performed can be avoided.

  Further, when the player misses the pressing order during the first stop operation, the main control means 100 again determines the stop switch to be operated during the second and third stop operations, and the player performs the first stop operation. You may make it display the pressing order number corresponding to the pressing order which consists of a stop switch and the newly determined stop switch for the 2nd and 3rd stop operation. In addition, after the newly determined push order number is displayed, the sub-control means 200 notifies the push order regarding the initial second and third stop operations according to the newly decided push order number. You may switch to the alert | report regarding 2nd, 3rd stop operation.

2. Second Embodiment Next, a slot machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. The difference between the slot machine of the present embodiment and the slot machine according to the first embodiment described above is that a part of the game progress main process executed by the main control means 100 is different, and the hardware configuration Other control contents are the same as those of the slot machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 55 shows a flowchart of the game progress main process in this embodiment.

  In the game progress main process shown in this figure, steps that perform the same process as the game progress main process (FIG. 27) of the slot machine according to the first embodiment are given the same numbers, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. The game progress main process shown in FIG. 55 is different from the game progress main process shown in FIG. 27 in that when the freeze number is determined to be 1 or 2 by the freeze lottery process in step S28, the dummy command set process (step SA1) is performed.

  Here, the detailed contents of the dummy command set process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the freeze lottery process executed in step S28 of the game progress main process shown in FIG. 55, if the freeze number is determined to be 1 or 2, the determination result in step S30 is YES, and the main control means 100 displays the result in FIG. The dummy command set process shown is executed. First, the main control means 100 stores the “push order flag” command (B000, see FIG. 25) including the second control command indicating the OFF state of the push order flag in the ring buffer (step S880). Next, the main control means 100 stores the “push order number” command (9500, see FIG. 25) including the second control command indicating the push order number 0 in the ring buffer (step S882).

  Next, the main control means 100 reads the winning / replay winning number stored in the RWM by the role lottery process in step S18, sets it in the CPU register (step S884), and sets an offset value (see FIG. 26 (a)) is added to obtain a mask number (step S886). Then, the mask number is stored in the ring buffer (step S888), and then the winning combination winning number stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM is read and stored in the ring buffer (step S890), and the dummy command set shown in FIG. End the process.

<Relationship between control command transmission timing and push order number display timing>
Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 57, the relationship between the transmission timing of the control command and the display timing of the push order number when the game progress main process of this embodiment is executed will be described. Hereinafter, the case where the freeze effect is executed in step S34 of FIG. 55 and the case where it is not performed will be described separately.

(A) When performing a freeze effect When the start switch 36 is operated, the result of determination in step S14 in FIG. 55 is YES, and a lottery process is performed (step S18). The replay winning number and the winning feature winning number are stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM. Thereafter, the push order number is determined by the non-AT state process (step S24) or the AT state process (step S26) according to the main mode. In step S28, a freeze lottery is performed (FIG. 34, step S592 or S604). When the freeze lottery is won, freeze number 1 or 2 is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (FIG. 41, step S600 or S610).

  Also, the determination result of step S30 in FIG. 55 is YES, and the state of the push order flag is turned off and the information of push order number 0 is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 by the dummy command set process in step SA1 (FIG. 55). 56, steps S880 and S882). Here, the actual push order flag may be on, but at this stage, the state where the push order flag is off is forcibly transmitted to the sub-control means 200. Subsequently, information on the mask number and the winning combination winning number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (FIG. 56, steps S888 and S890). Then, a freeze effect (reel effect) is started in step S34, and when the freeze effect ends (step S36, YES), a push order display process (FIG. 42) is performed in step S38.

  If the original push order flag is on (FIG. 42, step S630, YES), the push order number determined by the non-AT state process (step S24) or the AT state process (step S26) is set. An offset value (see FIG. 18) for designating the corresponding display mode is stored in the RWM address F018 (FIG. 42, step S632). On the other hand, if the original push order flag is off, a value (FFH) indicating that the acquired number display 28 is not displayed is stored in the RWM address F018 (FIG. 42, step). S634).

  In step S40, the state of the original pushing order flag is transmitted to the sub-control means 200, and the original pushing order number is sent to the sub-control means 200 in step S42. Thereafter, the original winning / replay winning number or mask number determined in the winning lottery process of step S18 is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 by the process of step S54. The reason for the notification of the pressing order by the acquired number display device 28 and the image display device 70 after the effect of the freeze is completed is the same reason as in the first embodiment.

  Moreover, in the case of 2nd Embodiment, the sub control means 200 can start the production | generation corresponding to a freeze number in the process based on an accessory winning number, without providing the process based on a freeze number command separately. For example, in the process based on the first prize winning number in one game, an effect corresponding to the freeze number is started, but since the push order flag is off, the push order is not notified. In the process based on the second prize winning number, since it is the second time, the effect corresponding to the freeze number is not performed, but when the original push order flag is on, the push order can be notified. By doing so, it is not necessary to provide the sub-control unit 200 with a process for each command, and the processing load on the sub-control unit 200 can be reduced.

(B) When the freeze effect is not executed When the start switch 36 is operated, the winning / replay winning number and the winning feature winning number determined by the winning lottery are stored in the RWM by the winning lottery process, and then the main mode is entered. Accordingly, the push order number is determined by non-AT state processing or AT state processing. Then, when it is shifted to the freeze lottery (FIG. 41, step S594 or S606, NO), the freeze number 0 is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (FIG. 41, steps S598 → S600). In this case, the dummy command setting process of FIG. 47 is not performed, and the freeze effect is not performed.

  For this reason, the push order number determined by the AT state process or the AT state process is displayed on the acquired number display 28 (step S30, NO → S38), and then the push order flag, push order number, winning / replay winning The number or mask number and the winning combination winning number are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control means 200.

3. Third Embodiment Next, a slot machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. Similarly to the slot machine according to the second embodiment, the slot machine according to the present embodiment is different from the slot machine according to the first embodiment described above in part of the game progress main process executed by the main control unit 100. ing. Also, the freeze lottery process (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment is partially different. FIG. 58 shows a flowchart of the game progress main process in this embodiment. FIG. 59 shows a flowchart of freeze lottery processing in the present embodiment.

  In the game progress main process of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 58, steps that perform the same processes as the game progress main process (FIG. 27) of the slot machine according to the first embodiment are given the same numbers, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. To do. The game progress main process shown in FIG. 58 is different from the game progress main process shown in FIG. 27 in that the process related to the execution of the freeze effect (steps S30 to S36) is executed immediately before the reel stop management process in step S58. It is a point (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 58).

  Further, in the freeze lottery process of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 59, the steps for performing the same process as the freeze lottery process (FIG. 41) of the slot machine according to the first embodiment are given the same numbers, and detailed description is omitted. To do. The freeze lottery process shown in FIG. 59 is different from the game progress main process shown in FIG. 41 in order to transmit information on freeze number 2 to the sub-control means 200 when the second freeze lottery is won. Then, after the “Freeze Number” command (see FIG. 25) is stored in the ring buffer, the push order lottery is performed for the winning number 32 in accordance with the state of the push order flag.

  That is, in the freeze lottery process in step S28 shown in FIG. 58, the freeze lottery process shown in FIG. 59 is executed, and in step S610, the “freeze number” command including the second control command indicating freeze number 2 is stored in the ring buffer. After saving, it is next determined whether or not the state of the push order flag stored in the RWM is on (step SB1). If the state of the push order flag is OFF, the determination result is NO, the freeze lottery process of FIG. 59 is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S38 (push order display process) of the game progress main shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB1 that the push order flag is on, the decision result is YES, and one of the six push orders of the stop switches 37L, 37C, and 37R is selected. Is determined (step SB2). Then, after the push order number corresponding to the determined push order is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM (step SB3), the freeze lottery process of FIG. 59 is terminated, and the game progress main step S38 shown in FIG. Move to the order display process.

<Relationship between control command transmission timing and push order number display timing>
Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 60, the relationship between the transmission timing of the control command and the display timing of the push order number when the game progress main process and the freeze lottery process of the present embodiment are executed will be described. Hereinafter, the case where the freeze effect is performed in step S34 of FIG. 58 and the case where it is not performed will be described separately.

(A) When performing freeze effect When the start switch 36 is operated, the result of determination in step S14 of FIG. 58 is YES, and the role lottery process is performed (step S18), and the winning determined by the role lottery process is performed. The replay winning number and the winning feature winning number are stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM. Thereafter, the push order number is determined by the non-AT state process (step S24) or the AT state process (step S26) according to the main mode. In step S28, a freeze lottery is performed (FIG. 59, step S592 or S604). When the freeze lottery is won, freeze number 1 or 2 is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 (FIG. 59, step S600 or S610).

  Next, in the push order display process in step S38 of FIG. 58, if the push order flag is on (FIG. 42, step S630, YES), the non-AT state process (step S24) or the AT state process (step S26), or an offset value (see FIG. 18) for designating a display mode corresponding to the push order number determined by the push order lottery in step SB2 of FIG. 59 is stored in the address F018 of the RWM (see FIG. 42, step S632). On the other hand, when the push order flag is off, a value (FFH) indicating that the acquired number display 28 is not displayed is stored in the address F018 of the RWM (FIG. 42, step S634). .

  Then, the state of the push order flag is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 based on the process of step S40, and the push order number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 by the process of step S38 based on the process of step S42. In addition, the winning / replay winning number or mask number and the winning item winning number are transmitted to the sub-control means 200. Thereafter, the determination result in step S30 is YES, and the freeze effect is started (step S34). When the freeze effect is ended (YES in step S36), the reel rotation is started by the reel stop management process in step S58. .

  In the third embodiment, even when the freeze effect is executed, the push order notification by the acquired number display device 28 and the image display device 70 is performed when the start lever is operated. However, in the third embodiment, even if the winning number 32 does not originally require notification of the pressing order, the pressing order is notified when the pressing order flag is on. For this reason, even if it is a case where notification of a pushing order is performed by the operation of a start lever, whether this freeze production is based on winning numbers 22-27 or winning number 32 , So that the player does not know. By doing in this way, since it is not necessary to change the timing which alert | reports a pressing order with the case where a freeze effect is performed and the case where a freeze effect is not performed, the processing burden of the main control means 100 can be reduced. it can.

(B) When Freeze Effect is not Performed When the start switch 36 is operated, a winning lottery process is performed, and a winning / replay winning number and a winning feature winning number determined by the winning lottery process are stored in the RWM. Thereafter, the push order number is determined by non-AT state processing or AT state processing according to the main mode. Then, the freeze lottery is performed, and when the freeze lottery is lost, the freeze number 0 is transmitted to the sub-control means 200.

  Next, the push order number is displayed on the acquired number display 28, and the state of the push order flag and the push order number are transmitted to the sub-control means 200. After the winning / replay winning number or mask number and the winning combination winning number are transmitted to the sub-control means 200, the determination result in step S30 is NO, and the reel in step S58 is performed without performing the freeze effect. The reel rotation is started by the stop management process.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the push order number is displayed on the acquired number display 28 before the start of the reel effect and before the reel rotation starts. That is, it is impossible to determine whether the player has a reel effect or whether the original rotation of the reel has started, depending on whether or not the push order number is displayed. Therefore, even if the reel effect is performed as if the original reel rotation has started, it cannot be determined that the reel effect is present, so that the interest of the reel effect is not impaired.

  In the freeze lottery process of FIG. 59, the push order lottery was performed only when the second freeze lottery in step S604 was won, but the winning number was determined to be 32 regardless of whether or not the second freeze lottery was successful. Sometimes steps SB1 to SB3 may be performed. By performing such processing, it can be avoided that the player is informed that the specific winning number has not been determined depending on whether or not the pressing order is notified.

<Modification>
(1) In the above-described embodiment, when the sub control unit 200 does not receive the push order number or when there is no push order to be preferentially notified, the sub control unit 200 uses the main control unit. You may make it alert | report the pushing order predetermined corresponding to the winning / replay winning number transmitted from 100. FIG.

(2) The AT game in the above-described embodiment is terminated when a predetermined number of games are consumed after the AT game is started. However, the AT is not limited to this, and there is a predetermined number of payouts. It may be terminated when a predetermined number of difference sheets are obtained. Moreover, you may make it complete | finish when the alert | report of the pressing order of predetermined times was performed. Here, the “predetermined number of times” may be the number of times of notification of all pushing orders, or the notification of the pushing order in the game won in the winnings -B to G or in the game won in the winnings -B to J. You may count the frequency | count of notification of a pushing order.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, the winning / replay winning number or mask number and the winning feature winning number are transmitted to the sub-control means 200 in this order. However, the winning winning number, winning / replay winning number or mask number is transmitted. May be transmitted to the sub-control means 200 in this order. In this case, it is desirable that the sub-control unit 200 performs the start switch operation process upon receiving the winning / replay winning number or the mask number.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, when the freeze effect is not executed, the push order number is displayed on the acquired number display 28 when the start switch 36 is operated, and when the freeze effect is executed, the freeze effect is displayed. Although the push order number is displayed on the acquired number display 28 after the production is finished, the timing for displaying the push order number on the acquired number display 28 is not limited to this, and after the reel starts rotating, The push order number may be displayed on the acquired number display 28, or the push order number may be displayed on the obtained number display 28 after the reel has reached constant speed rotation. Further, when the pressing order from the second stop operation is notified, the pressing order number may be displayed on the acquired number display 28 after the first stop operation. In addition, when displaying the push order number on the acquired number display 28 after the reel starts rotating, the push order number, the winning / replay winning number or mask number, and the winning feature winning number are transmitted after the display, The winning combination winning number is preferably transmitted to the sub-control means 200 before the reel reaches the constant speed rotation.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, when the push order hitting game is performed, the push order numbers 10 to 13 are determined, and the winning / replay winning numbers are masked. 13 is determined, for example, when the entire push order is concealed, the push order number 0 is determined, and when a part of the push order is concealed, any one of the push order numbers 7 to 9 is determined. May be. In this case, in order to separately notify the sub-control means 200 that a push-pushing game is to be performed, a push-pushing game command indicating that a push-pushing game is to be performed may be separately transmitted. When the re-game winning number is masked, a process of replacing it with a mask number for a pressing order game may be performed. However, the mask number for the push order hitting game needs to be set separately. In the above-described embodiment, a push order hit game may be performed during an AT game. However, a push order hit game may be performed when the game is not an AT game. (For example, in the normal state or the CZ state, when the winning number is 22 to 27, the push order game may be performed).

(6) In the above-described embodiment, the command is transmitted by the serial communication method, but may be performed by the parallel communication method. However, in the case of the parallel communication method, communication is possible even if any one of the plurality of communication lines is disconnected, so that erroneous information may be transmitted. Therefore, in the case of the parallel communication system, a predetermined command (for example, 00000101B) is transmitted at the start of each game (for example, when the start lever is operated), and at the end of each game (for example, when all stops) ) May transmit a predetermined command and a command (for example, 11111010B) in which ON / OFF of each bit is reversed, and it may be determined whether or not it is disconnected based on the result of these logical operations.

(7) In each embodiment mentioned above, you may perform the promotion lottery which determines whether the lottery result of a part lottery process is promoted to the result of a lottery result more advantageous to a player. For example, when “red 7-red 7-red 7” is displayed, the player is given in advance a privilege such as shifting to a more advantageous main mode or performing an AT lottery with a higher winning probability. Make up. In the main control means 100, when the winning number 2 (replay-B) is determined in the role lottery process, the promotion lottery is performed, and when the promotion lottery is won (for convenience, it is referred to as “rare winning a rare role”). The winning number is rewritten from 2 to 46, and the main control unit 100 performs processing corresponding to the winning number 46 (rare role winning) (for example, non-AT state processing / AT state processing, freeze lottery processing, push shown in FIG. And the conditional device number 46 is transmitted to the sub-control means 200. Note that the reel stop control is performed according to the operation flag generated based on the winning number 2 before the winning number is rewritten.

  Then, the sub-control means 200 notifies the pressing order of left → middle → right (the combination of symbols of the replay 01 is aligned) when the winning number 2 is received, and when the winning number 46 is received, the right → It is determined so that the order of pushing from the middle to the left (there is a possibility that the symbol combinations of the replay 10 may be aligned) (along with a notification such as “Aim at Red 7!”) May be made. Thereby, when “red 7-red 7-red 7” is displayed, the above-described privilege is given to the player.

  Even if the player fails to press the “Red 7” symbol, or operates the stop switch without following the notified pressing order, the above-mentioned privilege is granted based on winning the rare role. You may make it do. In the main control means 100, the rare combination is won (the promotion lottery is won), and the winning number is also rewritten to the rare combination winning number “46”, so the symbol combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is Regardless of whether or not they have been prepared, it is possible to perform processing when a rare role is won.

  Further, in this modification, the push order for displaying the rare combination (“red 7-red 7-red 7”) is one (right → middle → left), but the push order for displaying the rare combination is If there is a plurality, the specific numbering order is not associated with the winning number 46, and the main control means 100 sends the winning number 46 together with the winning number 46 (any one of the pressing order for displaying the rare combination) as a sub-control. You may transmit to the means 200.

  In addition, when the promotion lottery is won, the winning number is rewritten immediately after the promotion lottery is won, not immediately before the winning number (more specifically, the “production group number” command) is transmitted to the sub-control means 200. Good. This is because the determination of the push order number, the freeze lottery process, and the like are processed based on the winning number after rewriting. However, the winning number is not rewritten until at least an operation flag to be referred to at the time of reel stop control is generated and the winning number for output to the outside is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM. There is a need. Here, the use of the winning number output to the outside can be used, for example, when verifying the payout rate.

10 Slot machine 22 Checkout display LED
23 Replay indicator LED
24 Displayable LED
25 Game start indicator LED
26a, 26b, 26c Bet number display lamp 27 Credit number display 28 Acquired number display 33 Clearing switch 34 1-bet switch 35 Maximum bet switch 36 Start switch 37L, 37C, 37R Stop switch 40L, 40C, 40R Reel 42L, 42C , 42R Stepping motor 44L, 44C, 44R Reel rotation position sensor 45 Blocker 46 Hopper motor 47 Dispensing sensor 48 Door sensor 49 Setting door switch 64L, 64R Speaker 70 Image display device 72 Upper stage lamp 81 Setting value display 84 External concentration terminal board 91 Power switch 92 Setting change key switch 93 Reset / setting switch 100 Main control means 110 Winning role determination means 120 Freeze control means 122 Reel effect control means 1 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 0 Reel control means 140 Game state control means 142 Lottery state control means 144 Mode control means 146 Notification game control means 150 Prize determination means 160 Abnormality detection means 170 LED display control means 180 Control command transmission means 190 External signal transmission means 200 Sub control means 202 Sub control board 204 Image control board 210 Production control means 212 Production lottery means 214 Production state control means 220 Control command reception means 230, 240 Sub control command transmission / reception means 250 Image / sound output means 300 Operation means

Claims (1)

Multiple reels,
A stop switch for stopping the reel;
A display means having a plurality of segments and capable of displaying information relating to the operation mode of the stop switch or information relating to the game medium;
A role determination means for determining the winning role;
Storage means capable of storing in a predetermined storage area information for displaying information on the operation mode of the stop switch on the display means ;
A segment table in which the lighting mode of the segment is defined ;
Gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state;
With
As a gaming state, it has a notification gaming state for notifying the operation mode of the stop switch,
In the notification game state, when a predetermined combination is determined by the combination determination unit, information for displaying information on an operation mode of a stop switch on the display unit can be stored in the predetermined storage area, Information on the operation mode of the stop switch by enabling the lighting mode of the segment from the segment table based on the information stored in a predetermined storage area and lighting the segment of the display means in the lighting mode of the determined segment Can be displayed ,
In predetermined game state that is different from the notification gaming state, when the predetermined combination is determined by the combination determining means, slot machine characterized in that it does not display information about the operation mode of the stop switch on the display unit .

Images